Mercedes - A-Class - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013 (2)

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you drive off for the first time, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability The illustrations in this manual show a left-handdrive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features Consequently, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RPrinted Owner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Printed manual – in the vehicle In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the supplement for your multimedia system from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Digital – on the internet The online Owner's Manual provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital – as an app Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides app, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile internet or download it to use without internet access. Available for smartphones or tablets. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides app: Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides app may not yet be available in your country. i You can find out about important features of your vehicle in the interactive Owner's Manual on the internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ betriebsanleitung You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides app: Your Owner's Manuals: Digital – in the vehicle The Digital Owner's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative 1175843903Z102 É1175843903Z102MËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 4 Digital Owner's Manual ...................... 23 Introduction ........................................... 23 Operation ............................................... 23 Introduction ......................................... Environmental protection ...................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... Owner's Manual ..................................... Operating safety .................................... QR code for rescue card ........................ Data stored in the vehicle ...................... Copyright information ............................ 24 24 24 25 25 28 28 29 At a glance ........................................... Cockpit .................................................. Instrument cluster ................................. Multifunction steering wheel ................. Centre console ...................................... Door control panel ................................. Overhead control panel ......................... 30 30 32 33 34 37 38 Safety ................................................... Panic alarm ............................................ Occupant safety .................................... Children in the vehicle ........................... Pets in the vehicle ................................. Driving safety systems ........................... Protection against theft ......................... 39 39 39 54 65 65 73 Opening and closing ........................... Key ........................................................ Doors ..................................................... Boot ....................................................... Side windows ......................................... Panorama sliding sunroof ...................... 76 76 83 86 89 92 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97 Correct driver's seat position ................ 97 Seats ..................................................... 97 Steering wheel ..................................... 102 Mirrors ................................................. 103 Memory function ................................. 106 Lights and windscreen wipers ......... Exterior lighting ................................... Interior lighting .................................... Replacing bulbs ................................... Windscreen wipers .............................. 107 107 110 111 114 Climate control ................................. Overview of climate control systems ... Operating the climate control system .. Air vents .............................................. 117 117 120 130 Driving and parking .......................... Running-in notes .................................. Driving ................................................. DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ......... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................... Manual transmission ........................... Automatic transmission ....................... Refuelling ............................................. Parking ................................................ Driving tips .......................................... Driving systems ................................... Towing a trailer .................................... 132 132 132 On-board computer and displays .... Important safety notes ........................ Displays and operation ........................ Menus and submenus ......................... Display messages ................................ Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 200 200 200 203 216 Multimedia system ........................... General notes ...................................... Important safety notes ........................ Function restrictions ............................ Operating system ................................ 259 259 259 259 259 Stowing and features ....................... Loading guidelines ............................... Stowage areas ..................................... Features .............................................. 268 268 268 273 141 141 142 143 152 155 159 162 194 247 Contents Maintenance and care ...................... Engine compartment ........................... ASSYST PLUS ...................................... Care ..................................................... 280 280 284 286 Breakdown assistance ..................... Where will I find...? .............................. Flat tyre ............................................... Battery (vehicle) .................................. Jump-starting ....................................... Towing away and tow-starting ............. Electrical fuses .................................... 293 293 294 299 301 304 308 Wheels and tyres .............................. Important safety notes ........................ Operation ............................................ Winter operation .................................. Tyre pressure ....................................... Changing a wheel ................................ Wheel and tyre combinations .............. Emergency spare wheel ....................... 310 310 310 312 313 318 323 323 Technical data ................................... Information on technical data .............. Vehicle electronics .............................. Identification plates ............................. Service products and filling capacities ...................................................... Vehicle data ......................................... Trailer tow hitch ................................... 325 325 325 326 327 333 334 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC Display message ............................ 244 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 176 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 217 Function/notes ................................ 66 Important safety notes .................... 66 Warning lamp ................................. 250 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 53 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 266 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .................................... 124 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 121 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating .............. 209 Display message ............................ 223 Function/notes ................................ 67 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73 Adaptive brake lights .......................... 69 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 176 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 231 Function/notes ............................. 109 Switching on/off ........................... 110 Additional speedometer ................... 210 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 331 Address book See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 108 Adjusting the volume COMAND Online ............................ 260 Adjusting volume Audio 20 ........................................ 260 Air conditioning General notes ................................ 117 Air filter (white display message) .... 234 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes .................. 130 Rear ............................................... 131 Setting the centre air vents ........... 131 Setting the side air vents ............... 131 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Airbag Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation .......................... 47 Introduction ..................................... 44 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 40 Airbags Display message ............................ 226 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 45 Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Kneebag ........................................... 46 Sidebag ............................................ 46 Triggering ......................................... 51 Windowbag ...................................... 46 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 73 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 73 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) AMG Performance Seat .......................... 101 RIDE CONTROL sports suspension ................................................ 175 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 213 AMG Performance exhaust system ..................................................... 139 AMG RIDE CONTROL General Information ....................... 175 Anti-glare film .................................... 279 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Index Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Aquaplaning ....................................... 161 Ashtray ............................................... 275 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 208 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 208 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 285 Driving abroad ............................... 285 Hiding a service message .............. 285 Information about Service ............. 285 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 285 Service message ............................ 284 Special service requirements ......... 285 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 73 Function ........................................... 73 Switching off the alarm .................... 73 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 209 Display message ............................ 234 Function/notes ............................. 189 Audio 20 Switching on/off ........................... 259 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 206 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 230 see Lights Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 138 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 137 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 226 Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 47 Problems ......................................... 50 System self-test ............................... 49 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 107 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Drive program display .................... Drive programs .............................. Driving tips .................................... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients .............................. Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Overview ........................................ Problem (fault) ............................... Pulling away ................................... Selector lever ................................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... Trailer towing ................................. Transmission position display ........ Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency running mode ......................... Auxiliary heating Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Remote control .............................. Setting ........................................... Auxiliary heating/ventilation Display message ............................ 147 147 144 144 148 147 141 141 152 145 145 146 144 145 144 148 148 150 213 143 152 135 146 135 150 148 146 144 147 152 127 127 127 211 245 5 6 Index Important safety notes .................. Problem (display message) ............ Setting the departure time ............. Auxiliary ventilation Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (on the centre console) .............................. Remote control .............................. Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) ...................................................... 126 130 128 127 127 127 334 B Back button ....................................... 260 Ball coupling Folding in ....................................... 197 Folding in/out ................................ 197 Folding out ..................................... 197 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66 Battery (key) Checking .......................................... 79 Important safety notes .................... 79 Replacing ......................................... 79 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 301 Display message ............................ 232 Important safety notes .................. 299 Jump starting ................................. 301 Belt see Seat belts Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 51 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 209 Display message ............................ 235 Notes/function .............................. 192 Trailer towing ................................. 193 Blootooth® Connecting a different mobile phone ............................................ 263 Bluetooth® Searching for a mobile phone ........ 263 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Telephony ...................................... 262 Bonnet Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) ............................................... 280 Closing ........................................... 282 Display message ............................ 244 Important safety notes .................. 280 Opening ......................................... 281 Boot Emergency release .......................... 88 Important safety notes .................... 86 Opening (automatically from outside) ................................................. 87 Opening (from outside the vehicle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .............. 87 Opening automatically from inside ............................................... 88 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 86 Boot lid Display message ............................ 244 Opening dimensions ...................... 333 Boot load (maximum) ........................ 333 Brake EBD .................................................. 72 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 223 Notes ............................................. 331 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 113 Brake lamps Adaptive ........................................... 69 Display message ............................ 229 Brakes ABS .................................................. 66 BAS .................................................. 66 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 331 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation ..................................... 68 Display message ............................ 217 Driving tips .................................... 160 Hill start assist ............................... 136 HOLD function ............................... 172 Important safety notes .................. 160 Parking brake ................................ 157 Warning lamp ................................. 249 Index Braking assistance appropriate to the situation Function/notes ................................ 68 Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 293 see Flat tyre see Tow-starting see Towing away Buttons on the steering column ...... 201 C Calling up a fault see Display messages Car see Vehicle Car wash (care) ................................. Care Automatic car wash ....................... Carpets .......................................... Display ........................................... Exhaust pipe .................................. Exterior lighting ............................. Gear or selector lever .................... High-pressure cleaner .................... Interior ........................................... Matt paintwork .............................. Notes ............................................. Paint .............................................. Plastic trim .................................... Reversing camera .......................... Roof lining ...................................... Seat belt ........................................ Seat cover ..................................... Sensors ......................................... Steering wheel ............................... Trim pieces .................................... Washing by hand ........................... Wheels ........................................... Windows ........................................ Wiper blades .................................. Wooden trim .................................. CD See also Digital Owner's Manual ... CD player (on-board computer) ........ Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 286 286 292 290 290 289 291 287 290 287 286 287 290 289 292 291 291 289 291 291 286 288 288 288 291 259 206 211 Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 76 Centre console Lower section .................................. 35 Upper section .................................. 34 Child Restraint system .............................. 54 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 59 i-Size ................................................ 55 ISOFIX .............................................. 55 On the front-passenger seat ............ 57 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 58 Recommendations ........................... 63 Suitable positions ............................ 59 Top Tether ....................................... 56 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 64 Rear doors ....................................... 65 Cigarette lighter ................................ 276 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 289 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 290 Climate control Air conditioning ............................. 118 Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 126 Controlling automatically ............... 121 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 125 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 121 Demisting the windows .................. 124 Demisting the windscreen ............. 123 Indicator lamp ................................ 121 Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control .................................. 120 Notes on using the air-conditioning system ..................................... 118 Overview of systems ...................... 117 Problem with the rear window heating .......................................... 124 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 121 Setting the air distribution ............. 122 Setting the air vents ...................... 130 Setting the airflow ......................... 123 Setting the temperature ................ 122 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 124 7 8 Index Switching on/off ........................... 120 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 126 Switching the rear window heating on/off ...................................... 124 Switching the ZONE function on/off ............................................ 123 THERMOTRONIC (2-zone) automatic climate control ..................... 119 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 30 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 290 COMAND Online Switching on/off ........................... 259 Combination switch .......................... 109 Connecting a USB device See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 203 Controller ........................................... 260 Convenience closing feature .............. 90 Convenience opening feature ............ 90 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 125 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 283 Display message ............................ 231 Important safety notes .................. 332 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Temperature gauge ........................ 201 Warning lamp ................................. 255 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 29 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 228 Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... 163 Cruise control lever ....................... 163 Deactivating ................................... 164 Display message ............................ 237 Driving system ............................... 162 Important safety notes .................. 163 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 163 Selecting ........................................ 163 Setting a speed .............................. 164 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. Cup holder Centre console .............................. Important safety notes .................. Rear compartment ......................... 163 274 273 274 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Data see Technical data Data modem mode Telephone with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ........................................... 265 Daytime driving lights Display message ............................ 230 Function/notes ............................. 107 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 211 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Diesel .................................................. 330 Digital Owner's Manual Help ................................................. 23 Introduction ..................................... 23 Digital speedometer ......................... 204 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 228 Replacing bulbs ............................. 112 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 107 Switching on/off ........................... 108 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 144 Display message Driving systems ............................. 234 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 284 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 216 Engine ............................................ 231 General information ....................... 216 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 216 Key ................................................ 246 Lights ............................................. 228 Index Safety systems .............................. 217 Tyres .............................................. 239 Vehicle ........................................... 241 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Activating ....................................... 168 Calling up the speed ...................... 169 Cruise control lever ....................... 168 Deactivating ................................... 171 Display Message ............................ 236 Displays in the instrument cluster .. 171 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 171 Driving tips .................................... 172 Function/notes ............................. 167 Important safety notes .................. 167 Selecting ........................................ 168 Setting a speed .............................. 170 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 170 Stopping ........................................ 170 Storing the speed .......................... 169 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 67 Warning lamp ................................. 257 Distance warning signal (warning lamp) .................................................. 257 Door Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 211 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 85 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 76 Control panel ................................... 37 Display message ............................ 244 Emergency locking ........................... 85 Emergency unlocking ....................... 85 Important safety notes .................... 83 Opening (from the inside) ................ 83 Drive program Display ........................................... 146 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 144 Manual transmission ...................... 143 Drive programs Automatic transmission ................. 148 Driver's door see Door Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 285 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 107 Driving on flooded roads .................. 162 Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 67 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation ..................................... 68 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 72 STEER CONTROL ............................. 73 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73 Adaptive brake lights ....................... 69 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66 Distance warning function ............... 67 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 69 Important safety guidelines ............. 66 Overview .......................................... 65 Driving system Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 167 Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 177 Parking Pilot .................................. 180 RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ........................................ 174 Speed limiter ................................. 165 Start-off assist ............................... 174 Driving systems AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... 175 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 189 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 192 Cruise control ................................ 162 Display message ............................ 234 HOLD function ............................... 172 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 193 Lane package ................................ 191 Reversing camera .......................... 184 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 190 Driving tips Aquaplaning ................................... 161 Automatic transmission ................. 147 Brakes ........................................... 160 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 172 Downhill gradient ........................... 160 Driving abroad ............................... 107 Driving in winter ............................. 162 Driving on flooded roads ................ 162 Driving on wet roads ...................... 161 9 10 Index Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... New brake pads/linings ................ Running-in tips ............................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical dipped beam ............. The first 1500 km .......................... Towing a trailer .............................. Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... See also Digital Owner's Manual ... DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Climate control (air conditioning) .. Climate control (THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 159 159 162 161 161 132 313 107 132 196 161 206 259 141 141 119 120 E EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 219 Function/notes ................................ 72 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 159 On-board computer ....................... 204 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 138 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 137 Deactivating/activating ................. 138 General information ....................... 137 Important safety notes .................. 137 Introduction ................................... 137 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 53 Emergency key Unlocking the driver's door .............. 85 Emergency key element Function/notes ................................ 78 Inserting .......................................... 79 Locking vehicle ................................ 85 Removing ......................................... 79 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 85 Emergency spare wheel General notes ................................ 324 Important safety notes .................. 323 Removing ....................................... 324 Emergency unlocking Boot ................................................. 88 Vehicle ............................................. 85 Engine Display message ............................ 231 ECO start/stop function ................ 137 Engine number ............................... 327 Jump-starting ................................. 301 Running irregularly ......................... 139 Starting (important safety notes) ... 134 Starting problems .......................... 139 Starting the engine with the key .... 135 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 135 Stopping ........................................ 156 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 307 Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) ............................................... 255 Engine electronics Notes ............................................. 325 Problem (fault) ............................... 139 Engine jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Engine oil Additives ........................................ 331 Checking the oil level ..................... 282 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 282 Display message ............................ 233 Filling capacity ............................... 331 Notes about oil grades ................... 330 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 282 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Topping up ..................................... 283 Index Entering an address See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 24 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 214 Characteristics ................................. 70 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 71 Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 70 Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 209 Display message ............................ 217 Function/notes ................................ 69 General notes .................................. 69 Important safety guidelines ............. 70 Trailer stabilisation .......................... 72 Warning lamp ................................. 252 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 70 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... 290 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... 289 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 103 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 104 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) ...................................... 213 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Parking position ............................. 105 Resetting ....................................... 104 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 106 F Fault message see Display messages Favourites Overview ........................................ 260 Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Fire extinguisher ............................... 293 First-aid kit ......................................... 293 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 321 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 322 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 319 Raising the vehicle ......................... 320 Removing a wheel .......................... 321 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 319 Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel ................................... 318 MOExtended tyres ......................... 295 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 294 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 296 see Emergency spare wheel Floormat ............................................. 278 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 325 Two-way radio ................................ 325 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation Display message ............................ 226 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Operation ......................................... 47 Problems ......................................... 50 System self-test ............................... 49 Fuel Additives ........................................ 329 Consumption statistics .................. 203 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 204 Displaying the range ...................... 204 Driving tips .................................... 159 E10 ................................................ 328 Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Grade (petrol) ................................ 328 Important safety notes .................. 328 Low outside temperatures ............. 330 Notes for CLA 250 ......................... 329 Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles ................................................ 329 11 12 Index Problem (malfunction) ................... 155 Quality (diesel) ............................... 330 Refuelling ....................................... 152 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 328 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 154 Fuel filter (white display message) .. 234 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 204 Gauge .............................................. 32 Fuel reserve see Fuel Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 328 Problem (malfunction) ................... 155 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 309 Before changing ............................. 308 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 308 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 309 Important safety notes .................. 308 G Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 213 Gearshift program SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 214 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 24 Glove compartment .......................... 269 Google™ Local Search See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 H HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 87 Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 246 Switching on/off ........................... 109 Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 99 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 100 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 100 Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 100 Headlamp flasher .............................. 109 Headlamps Misting up ...................................... 110 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaners .................... 287 Hill start assist .................................. 136 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 173 Deactivating ................................... 173 Display message ............................ 234 Function/notes ............................. 172 Home address See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Horn ...................................................... 30 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser .......................................... 73 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 254 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant .......................................... 255 Engine diagnostics ......................... 255 SPORT handling mode ................... 253 Indicator lamps Display message ............................ 228 see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 32 Settings ......................................... 210 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 200 Interior lighting Control ........................................... 111 Overview ........................................ 110 Reading lamp ................................. 110 Interior motion sensor Deactivating ..................................... 75 Function ........................................... 75 Priming ............................................ 75 Switching off .................................... 75 iPod® See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Index ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 55 J Jack Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Storage location ............................ 294 Using ............................................. 320 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 301 K Key Changing the battery ....................... 79 Checking the battery ....................... 79 Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Convenience opening feature .......... 90 Display message ............................ 246 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76 Emergency key element ................... 78 Important safety notes .................... 76 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 78 Loss ................................................. 81 Modifying the programming ............. 78 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 133 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Starting the engine ........................ 135 Key positions Start/Stop button .......................... 133 Key positions (ignition lock) ............ 133 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing ........................ 90 Deactivation ..................................... 77 Locking ............................................ 77 Unlocking ......................................... 77 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 148 Manual gearshifting ....................... 152 Kneebag ............................................... 46 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 209 Display message ............................ 235 Function/information .................... 193 Lane package ..................................... Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... Lashing eyelets ................................. Licence plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light sensor (display message) ....... Lighting see Lights Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. Automatic headlamp mode ............ Dipped-beam headlamps ............... Driving abroad ............................... Hazard warning lamps ................... Headlamp flasher ........................... Headlamp range ............................ Light switch ................................... Main-beam headlamps ................... Misted up headlamps .................... Parking lamps ................................ Rear foglamp ................................. Setting exterior lighting ................. Side lamps ..................................... Switching the daytime driving lights on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. Turn signals ................................... LIM indicator lamp Cruise control ................................ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. Variable limiter .............................. Limiter Calling up the speed ...................... Deactivating, variable .................... Function/notes ............................. LIM indicator lamp ......................... Permanent ..................................... Setting a speed .............................. Storing the current speed .............. Switching to passive ...................... Variable ......................................... Limiting the speed Speed limiter ................................. Loading guidelines ............................ Locking see Central locking 191 214 272 229 230 109 107 108 107 109 109 108 107 109 110 108 108 107 108 211 109 163 168 165 166 166 165 165 166 166 166 166 165 165 268 13 14 Index Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 85 Emergency locking ........................... 85 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 84 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 211 Luggage compartment enlargement ................................................... 271 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 101 M M+S tyres ........................................... Main-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. Display message ............................ Replacing bulbs ............................. Switching on/off ........................... Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Manual transmission Drive program ................................ DYNAMIC SELECT button .............. Engaging reverse gear ................... Gear lever ...................................... Pulling away ................................... Shift recommendation ................... Shifting to neutral .......................... Starting the engine ........................ Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. Memory card (audio) ......................... Memory function ............................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Switch in the overhead control panel .............................................. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Traffic Sign Assist .......................... Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 312 109 229 113 109 143 141 142 142 135 143 142 135 287 206 106 277 190 Messages see Display messages Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 289 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in sun visor) Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 262 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 263 Connecting the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ......... 265 Frequencies ................................... 325 Installation ..................................... 325 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 207 Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 277 Transmission output (maximum) .... 325 Mobile telephone Pre-installed bracket ...................... 278 Modifying the programming (key) ..... 78 MOExtended tyres ............................. 295 MP3 Operating ....................................... 206 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 202 Permanent display ......................... 210 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 201 Overview .......................................... 33 Music files See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 N Navigation Entering a destination .................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ See also Digital Owner's Manual ... Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 261 205 259 132 O 216 Occupant safety Airbags ............................................ 44 Index Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation .......................... 47 Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 53 Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 Important safety notes .................... 39 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp ................................................. 40 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 53 Restraint system introduction .......... 39 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40 Seat belts ........................................ 41 Odometer ........................................... 203 On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 213 Assistance graphic menu ............... 208 Assistance menu ........................... 208 Audio menu ................................... 206 Convenience submenu .................. 212 Display messages .......................... 216 Displaying a service message ........ 285 Factory settings ............................. 213 Heating submenu ........................... 211 Important safety notes .................. 200 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 210 Light submenu ............................... 211 Menu overview .............................. 203 Message memory .......................... 216 Navigation menu ............................ 205 Operating video DVD ..................... 206 Operation ....................................... 201 RACETIMER ................................... 214 Service menu ................................. 210 Settings menu ............................... 210 Standard display ............................ 203 Telephone menu ............................ 207 Trip menu ...................................... 203 Vehicle submenu ........................... 211 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 113 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 25 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety note ...................... 25 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Owner's Manual .................... 23 Outside temperature display ........... 200 Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 65 P Paint code .......................................... 326 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 287 Panic alarm .......................................... 39 Panorama sliding sunroof Important safety information ........... 92 Operating ......................................... 93 Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof ........................... 94 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95 Rain-closing feature (when driving) .................................................. 94 Rain-closing feature (when the engine is switched off) ..................... 94 Reversing feature ............................. 93 Parking Important safety notes .................. 155 Parking brake ................................ 157 Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side ................................................ 105 Reversing camera .......................... 184 Parking aid see Exterior mirrors see Reversing camera Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 179 Driving system ............................... 177 Function/notes ............................. 177 Important safety notes .................. 177 Problems (faults) ........................... 180 Sensor range ................................. 177 Warning display ............................. 178 Parking brake Applying automatically (vehicles with automatic transmission) ......... 158 Applying automatically (vehicles with manual transmission) ............. 158 15 16 Index Applying or releasing manually ...... 157 Display message ............................ 219 Electric parking brake .................... 157 Emergency braking ........................ 158 General information ....................... 157 Releasing automatically ................. 158 Warning lamp ................................. 254 Parking lamps Display message ............................ 229 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Parking Pilot Cancelling ...................................... 184 Detecting parking spaces .............. 181 Display Message ............................ 235 Exiting a parking space .................. 183 Function/notes ............................. 180 Important safety notes .................. 180 Parking .......................................... 182 Towing a trailer .............................. 180 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 226 Indicator lamps ................................ 40 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 226 Petrol .................................................. 328 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 Phone book See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 290 Power socket Boot ............................................... 276 Power windows see Side windows Pre-Crash Safety System see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Operation ......................................... 53 PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant safety system) Display message ............................ 223 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 73 Immobiliser ...................................... 73 Interior motion sensor ..................... 75 Tow-away protection ........................ 74 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 24 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 135 General notes ................................ 135 Hill start assist ............................... 136 Manual transmission ...................... 135 Trailer ............................................ 136 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 28 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 R RACE START important safety notes ................... 174 RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 174 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 214 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 206 see separate operating instructions Radio mode See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Rain closing feature (panorama sliding sunroof) ................................... 94 Reading lamp ..................................... 110 Rear bench seat Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 271 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 131 Rear foglamp Changing the bulb .......................... 113 Display message ............................ 229 Switching on/off ........................... 108 Rear lamps see Lights Rear window heating Problem (fault) ............................... 124 Switching on/off ........................... 124 Index Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator ........................................ 44 Rear-view mirror Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 104 Dipping (manual) ........................... 103 Refuelling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Important safety notes .................. 152 Notes for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles ................................................ 329 Refuelling process ......................... 153 see Fuel Remote control Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 127 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) ......................................... 129 Replacing bulbs Brake lamp .................................... 113 Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 112 Fitting/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .................................... 112 Important safety notes .................. 111 Main-beam headlamps ................... 113 Overview of bulb types .................. 112 Rear fog lamp ................................ 113 Turn signals (front) ......................... 113 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 113 Replacing the battery (auxiliary heating remote control) .................... 129 Rescue card ......................................... 28 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 234 Warning lamp ................................. 255 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 126 Restraint system Display message ............................ 225 Introduction ..................................... 39 Warning lamp ................................. 254 Warning lamp (function) ................... 40 Rev counter ........................................ 200 Reverse gear Engaging (manual transmission) .... 142 Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 146 Reversing camera "Reverse parking" function ............ 186 Cleaning instructions ..................... 289 Coupling up a trailer function ........ 188 Display in the multimedia system .. 185 Function/notes ............................. 184 General notes ................................ 184 Switching on/off ........................... 185 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93 Side windows ................................... 89 Reversing function Roller sunblind ................................. 94 Reversing lamps Display message ............................ 230 Roller sunblind Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 94 Roof carrier ........................................ 273 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ...................................... 292 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 333 Route guidance See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 see Occupant safety Safety system see Driving safety systems SD card Inserting ........................................ 267 Inserting/removing ........................ 267 Removing ....................................... 267 SD memory card See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Seat Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 101 Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 271 Seat belt Correct usage .................................. 42 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...................... 212 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 43 Adjusting the height ......................... 43 Cleaning ......................................... 291 17 18 Index Display message ............................ 224 Fastening ......................................... 43 Important safety guidelines ............. 41 Introduction ..................................... 41 Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 44 Releasing ......................................... 43 Warning lamp ................................. 248 Warning lamp (function) ................... 44 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 99 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 101 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99 Cleaning the cover ......................... 291 Correct driver's seat position ........... 97 Important safety notes .................... 97 Seat heating problem .................... 102 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 106 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 101 Securing luggage ............................... 272 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 291 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 289 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 210 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 331 Coolant (engine) ............................ 332 Engine oil ....................................... 330 Fuel ................................................ 327 Important safety notes .................. 327 Washer fluid ................................... 332 Setting the air distribution ............... 122 Setting the airflow ............................ 123 Setting the date/time format See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Setting the language See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Setting the time See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 213 On-board computer ....................... 210 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 214 Shifting to neutral (manual transmission) ............................................. 142 Side lamps Switching on/off ........................... 108 Side windows Convenience closing ........................ 90 Convenience opening ...................... 90 Important safety notes .................... 89 Opening/closing .............................. 89 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92 Resetting ......................................... 91 Reversing feature ............................. 89 Sidebag ................................................ 46 SIM card Inserting ........................................ 265 Sliding sunroof see Panorama sliding sunroof SMS See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Snow chains ...................................... 313 Sockets Centre console .............................. 276 General notes ................................ 276 Rear compartment ......................... 276 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 260 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Spectacles compartment ................. 269 Speed limiter Display message ............................ 237 Important safety notes .................. 165 Selecting ........................................ 165 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 210 Digital ............................................ 204 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32 Segments ...................................... 200 Selecting a display unit .................. 210 Index SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 71 Warning lamp ................................. 253 Start-off assist Activating ....................................... 174 Important safety notes .................. 174 Start/Stop button Removing ....................................... 134 Starting the engine ........................ 135 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 134 STEER CONTROL .................................. 73 Steering Display message ............................ 245 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 201 Cleaning ......................................... 291 Gearshift paddles ........................... 150 Important safety notes .................. 102 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 150 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 214 Stowage compartment Map pockets .................................. 270 Stowage compartments Armrest (front) ............................... 269 Armrest (under) ............................. 270 Centre console .............................. 269 Centre console (rear) ..................... 270 Cup holder ..................................... 273 Glove compartment ....................... 269 Important safety information ......... 268 Spectacles compartment ............... 269 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 270 Stowage net ....................................... 270 Stowage space Stowage net ................................... 270 Stowage well beneath the boot floor .................................................... 272 Summer tyres .................................... 312 Sun visor ............................................ Suspension Adaptive Damping System ............. Suspension settings AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension .......................................... Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 275 176 175 266 T Tail lamps Display message ............................ see Lights Tank see Fuel tank Technical data Capacities ...................................... Information .................................... Trailer loads ................................... Tyres/wheels ................................. Vehicle data ................................... Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. Authorising a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... Connecting a Mobile phone (general information) ............................ Display message ............................ Introduction ................................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialling ....................................... Rejecting/ending a call ................. See also Digital Owner's Manual ... Switching between mobile phones ........................................... Telephone compartment ................ Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) Activating and connecting the module ........................................... Charging a mobile phone ............... Connecting the mobile phone ........ Connecting the module via a USB cable .............................................. Data modem mode ........................ 229 327 325 334 323 333 207 263 262 246 207 207 207 208 207 259 263 270 264 266 265 264 265 19 20 Index Installing the module ..................... 264 Introduction ................................... 263 Saving/deleting the PIN for the SIM card ........................................ 266 Settings ......................................... 266 SIM card mode .............................. 265 Text messages ............................... 266 Transferring the phone book .......... 266 Temperature Coolant .......................................... 201 Coolant (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 213 Outside temperature ...................... 200 Setting (climate control) ................ 122 Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 213 TEMPOMAT Function/notes ............................. 162 Text messages Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) ....................... 266 Through-loading ................................ 271 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 214 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 296 Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Important safety notes .................. 296 Storage location ............................ 294 Tyre pressure not reached ............. 297 Tyre pressure reached ................... 298 Top Tether ............................................ 56 Total distance recorder .................... 203 Tow-away protection Activating ......................................... 74 Deactivating ..................................... 74 Function ........................................... 74 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 307 Fitting the towing eye .................... 305 Important safety notes .................. 304 Removing the towing eye ............... 305 Towing Important safety notes .................. 304 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 307 Transporting the vehicle ................ 307 Towing a trailer Axle load, permissible .................... 334 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 72 Failure check for LEDs ................... 199 General notes ................................ 196 Parking Pilot .................................. 180 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 136 Trailer tow hitch display message .. 245 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................... 305 Removing the towing eye ............... 305 With both axles on the ground ....... 306 With front axle raised ..................... 306 Towing eye ......................................... 294 Traffic Sign Assist Activating ....................................... 191 Activating/deactivating the warning function .................................... 208 Display message ............................ 236 Function/notes ............................. 190 Important safety notes .................. 191 Instrument cluster display ............. 191 Trailer Folding the ball coupling in/out ..... 197 Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer Trailer towing 7-pin connector ............................. 199 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 290 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 198 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 198 Driving tips .................................... 196 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 197 Folding out the ball coupling .......... 197 Important safety notes .................. 194 Lights display message .................. 228 Power supply ................................. 198 Trailer loads ................................... 334 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 144 Transporting the vehicle .................. 307 Index Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. Trip meter Calling up ....................................... Resetting (on-board computer) ...... Turn signal lamp Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... Turn signals Replacing bulbs (front) ................... Switching on/off ........................... Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... Installation ..................................... Transmission output (maximum) .... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tyre pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Display message ............................ Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tyre pressure loss warning General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... Checking ........................................ Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Information on driving .................... M+S tyres ...................................... MOExtended tyres ......................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Storing ........................................... Summer tyres ................................ Tyre size (data) .............................. Tyre tread ...................................... see Flat tyre 291 203 203 204 113 113 109 325 325 325 315 239 297 298 313 314 315 315 316 315 315 316 317 317 258 317 318 310 319 239 323 310 310 312 312 318 311 319 312 323 311 U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 85 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 84 Upshift indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 213 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 267 V Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 275 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 28 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 241 Electronics ..................................... 325 Equipment ....................................... 25 Implied warranty .............................. 28 Individual settings .......................... 210 Leaving parked up ......................... 159 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 85 Locking (key) ................................... 76 Lowering ........................................ 322 Pulling away ................................... 135 Raising ........................................... 320 Registration ..................................... 28 Securing from rolling away ............ 319 Transporting .................................. 307 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 85 Unlocking (key) ................................ 76 Vehicle data ................................... 333 Vehicle data Boot load (maximum) ..................... 333 Roof load (maximum) ..................... 333 21 22 Index Vehicle dimensions ........................... 333 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 85 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 326 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 294 Ventilation Setting the vents ........................... 130 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 206 See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 VIN Seat ............................................... 327 Type plate ...................................... 326 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 250 Active Brake Assist ........................ 257 Brakes ........................................... 249 Distance warning signal ................. 257 ESP® .............................................. 252 ESP® OFF ....................................... 253 Fuel tank ........................................ 255 LIM (cruise control) ........................ 163 LIM (Distance Pilot DISTRONIC) .... 168 LIM (variable limiter) ...................... 165 Overview .......................................... 32 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 40 Reserve fuel ................................... 255 Seat belt ........................................ 248 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 258 Warning triangle ................................ 293 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 246 Weather display (COMAND Online) See also Digital Owner's Manual ... 259 Wheel and tyre combinations Tyres .............................................. 323 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 322 Wheel chock ...................................... 319 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 318 Changing/replacing ....................... 318 Checking ........................................ 310 Cleaning ......................................... 288 Emergency spare wheel ................. 323 Fitting a new wheel ........................ 321 Important safety notes .................. 310 Information on driving .................... 310 Removing a wheel .......................... 321 Storing ........................................... 319 Tightening torque ........................... 322 Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 323 Windowbag Display message ............................ 225 Operation ......................................... 46 Windows Cleaning ......................................... 288 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting ...................................... 123 Windscreen washer system Important safety notes .................. 332 Topping up ..................................... 284 Windscreen wipers Display message ............................ 246 Problem (malfunction) ................... 116 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 115 Switching on/off ........................... 114 Winter driving General notes ................................ 312 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces ................... 162 Snow chains .................................. 313 Winter tyres Limiting the speed (on-board computer) ............................................. 211 M+S tyres ...................................... 312 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 288 Important safety notes .................. 115 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 291 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 123 Digital Owner's Manual Introduction The printed Owner's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Owner's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Owner's Manual via the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Owner's Manual. The Digital Owner's Manual works without connecting to the internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Owner's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Owner's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. Operation Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Press the Ø button on the centre console. The vehicle overview appears. X Select the "Owner's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Acknowledge 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Owner's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Owner's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 260). Content pages You can access the pages of content by means of a visual search or a keyword search or by using the table of contents. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information text or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select the % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Owner's Manual: select the Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the centre console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Owner's Manual remains open in the background. X 23 24 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction Environmental protection General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ryour Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel consumption. Robserve the correct tyre pressure. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Take-back of end-of-life vehicles EU countries only: Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environmentally-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) EndOf-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the takeback conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine MercedesBenz parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case: Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rif other road users could be endangered Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely affected Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (Y page 326) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment i This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of publication of the Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all the systems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Z 25 Introduction Operating safety Introduction 26 Operating safety Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves: The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You can obtain further information from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity 1. The signatory, as a representative Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, Czech Republic ID no.: 64-387-5933 VAT ID no.: CZ64-387-5933 declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product: 2. Description: a) Jack Type, number: A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 Year of manufacture: 2015 Fulfils all relevant conditions Directive no. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use: The jack is intended only for raising the specified vehicle according to the operating instructions affixed to the jack. 3. Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693 B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN 10435 C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10 Technical documentation for the product is held by the manufacturer. Authorised representative for the compilation of the technical documentation: director of the technical department at Brano a.s. Operating safety Date Signed by: Director of Quality Introduction 4. Hradec nad Moravicí City 5. 05.05.2015 TIREFIT kit Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: EC declaration of conformity In accordance with EC directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0852, DT/UW 200016 MB part no.: A 000 583 22 02 complies with the following relevant regulations: EMC 72/245/EC Applied harmonised standards, in particular: ISO 7637-2: 2004 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau, Germany Authorised representative: IMS department Date: June 2011 Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is used for connecting diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. 27 Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your Z Introduction 28 Data stored in the vehicle vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conversions Rwork on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases: Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer Rif your vehicle has not yet been inspected at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example. Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions are not covered either by Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains, in a compact form, the most important information about your vehicle, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data stored in the vehicle Many of the electronic components in your vehicle can store data. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Revents Rfaults In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. This includes, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rstatus messages concerning the vehicle and its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. airbag deploy- ment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature These data are of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults and defects Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimise vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and fault data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranty events Rquality assurance The information is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more information there, if required. After a fault has been rectified, the information is deleted from the fault memory or is continually overwritten. During vehicle operation, certain situations may arise in which these technical data – in conjunction with other information and, if applicable, after consultation with an approved assessor – may be linked to an individual person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in the event of an emergency. electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Copyright information General information Information on licences for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its Z 29 Introduction Copyright information 30 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel gearshift paddles 150 ; Combination switch 109 = Instrument cluster 32 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 144 B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel Function Page D Climate control systems 117 E Ignition lock 133 F Adjusts the steering wheel 102 G Cruise control lever 163 H Electric parking brake 157 I Light switch 107 178 J Diagnostics connection 38 K Opens the bonnet 27 281 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Overhead control panel ; Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display 178 = Combination switch 109 ? Instrument cluster 32 A Horn B DIRECT SELECT lever 144 C Steering wheel gearshift paddles 150 38 Function Page D Light switch 107 E Electric parking brake 157 F Opens the bonnet 281 G Diagnostics connection H Ignition lock 133 I Adjusts the steering wheel 102 J Cruise control lever 163 K Climate control systems 117 27 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Function : Page Speedometer with segments Indicator and warning lamps: L Dipped-beam headlamps T Side lamps K Main-beam headlamps ÷ ESP® ! Electric parking brake applied (red) ! Electric parking brake (yellow) · Distance warning å ESP® OFF ! ABS malfunctioning J Brakes 200 ; #! Turn signals 109 = Multifunction display 202 Function ? 108 108 109 252 254 254 257 252 250 249 A B Page Rev counter Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system ü Seat belt not fastened % Diesel engine: preglow M SPORT handling mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) R Rear foglamp ; Engine diagnostics h Tyre pressure monitor 200 Coolant temperature gauge Indicator and warning lamps: ? Coolant too hot/cold 201 Fuel gauge display Indicator and warning lamps: æ Reserve fuel 40 248 135 253 108 255 258 255 255 Multifunction steering wheel 33 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Makes or accepts a call Further telephone functions W X Adjusts the volume 8 Mute ? Switches on voiceoperated control for navigation or LINGUATRONIC Page 202 207 i You can find further information in vehicles with an Audio 20 multimedia system: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Owner's Manual Ron voice-controlled navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions Function ? ò Opens the menu list 9 : Selects a menu a Confirms the selection % Back Operates the on-board computer ? Switches off voiceoperated control for navigation or LINGUATRONIC Page 201 i You can find further information in vehicles with a COMAND Online multimedia system: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Owner's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Owner's Manual Ron LINGUATRONIC in the separate operating instructions 34 Centre console Centre console At a glance Centre console, upper section Function : Multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions ; c Seat heating Mercedes-AMG vehicles: AMG RIDE CONTROL (left side) Mercedes-AMG vehicles: adjusts the exhaust flap of the AMG performance exhaust system (right side) = c Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Page 101 175 139 179 Function Page ? è ECO start/stop function 137 A £ Hazard warning lamps 109 B PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps 40 C DYNAMIC SELECT button å Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® 141 & Auxiliary heating 126 D 71 Centre console 35 At a glance Centre console, lower section i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Function : ; Function Page Page = Cup holders 273 Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Stowage compartment 275 276 276 268 ? Stowage space with Media Interface 268 A Stowage compartment Cup holders 268 273 Multimedia system controller; see the separate operating instructions Centre console At a glance 36 i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function Function Page Page ? DYNAMIC SELECT controller 141 Ashtray Cigarette lighter Power socket Stowage compartment 275 276 276 268 A Cup holders 273 B Stowage space with Media Interface 268 ; Selector lever 146 C = Manual gearshifting (permanent setting) Multimedia system controller; see the separate operating instructions 150 : Door control panel 37 At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 83 B ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle W Opens/closes the side windows 89 84 C = r45= Saves the seat and exterior mirror settings 106 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 65 ? Adjusts the seats electrically 99 q Opens the boot 88 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 103 D 38 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 110 ; p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 110 = | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off 110 ? ë Primes/deactivates tow-away protection A Rear-view mirror B ê Primes/deactivates the interior motion sensor 74 104 75 Function C Page G SOS button (MercedesBenz emergency call system), only available for certain countries 277 D Spectacles compartment 269 E 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblinds 93 F c Switches the front interior lighting on 110 G p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 110 Panic alarm To activate: press and hold ! button : for approx. one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO: X Press the Start/Stop button. The key must be in the vehicle. The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. X Occupant safety The various components of the restraint system work complementary to one another. They can only perform their intended protective function if all vehicle occupants: Rhave correctly fastened their seat belt (Y page 42) Rhave correctly adjusted their seat and head restraint (Y page 97). As the driver, you must also ensure that the steering wheel is correctly adjusted. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 97). Additionally, you must ensure that an airbag can deploy freely (Y page 44). The airbag is supplementary to a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. If the protection provided by the seat belt is sufficient, the airbags do not deploy. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, only airbags which provide greater protection in the given accident situation deploy. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on how the restraint system operates can be found in "Deployment of the seat belt tensioner and airbags" (Y page 51). See "Children in the vehicle" for information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children(Y page 54). Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system includes: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing system Important safety notes G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If the vehicle needs to be adapted to accommodate a person with disabilities, please contact a specialist workshop. Z 39 Safety Occupant safety 40 Occupant safety Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only driving aids that have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Safety Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the automatic deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, then both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the frontpassenger front airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must be either disabled or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a rearward-facing child restraint system: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). RChildren in a forward-facing child restraint system: depending on the installed child restraint system and the age and size of the child, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. Therefore, it is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactiva- Occupant safety Seat belts Introduction A correctly worn seat belt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of a collision or if the vehicle overturns. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from it. The seat belt also helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the airbag being deployed. The seat belt system consists of: Rseat belts Rbelt tensioners for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Rbelt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply from the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. The belt tensioner tightens the seat belt in the event of a collision so that it fits tightly across your body. However, it does not pull the vehicle occupants back in the direction of the seat backrest. The belt tensioner does not, however, correct an incorrect seat position or correct the routing of a seat belt that is worn incorrectly. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The belt force limiters on the front seats are synchronised with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be triggered in the event of an accident and would have to be replaced. Important safety notes G WARNING If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy Z Safety tion system" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. The frontpassenger front airbag is enabled. Depending on the stature of the person on the frontpassenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may light up. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger seat should not be used. It is imperative to observe the notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 47) as well as on "Seat belts" (Y page 41) and "Airbags" (Y page 44). There, you can also find information on the correct seat position. 41 42 Occupant safety Safety braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 47) Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Other- wise, your vehicle's general operating permit could be invalidated. Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit another multipoint seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection. G WARNING If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Only use the standard three-point seat belt. Never modify the seat belt system. Correct seat belt use Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat belt (Y page 41). All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts correctly before you start driving. You must also make sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts correctly during the journey. When fastening your seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt buckle that belongs to the seat. Rthe seat belt is tightened across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the centre of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height as necessary. RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as possible over your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. Pregnant women must take particular care with this. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Occupant safety or fragile objects. If such objects are located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys, spectacles, etc. stow these in a suitable location. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Babies and children must never travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. You must also make sure that objects, e.g. cushions, are never placed between a person and the seat. Seat belts are solely intended to secure and restrain persons. To secure objects, luggage or loads, always observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 268). Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 41) and the information on the correct use of the seat belt (Y page 42). matically; see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 43). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the centre of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide belt outlet downwards. X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages. Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press release button in belt buckle, hold belt tongue firmly and guide the seat belt back. Seat belt adjustment Basic illustration Adjust the seat (Y page 97). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened autoX The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe seat belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (Y page 212). Z Safety RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed 43 44 Occupant safety Safety Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. A warning tone may also sound. The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone stops as soon as the driver's and the co-driver's seat belts have been fastened. Rear seat belt status indicator The seat belts on the left and centre rear seats, when viewed in the direction of travel, are not fastened. (Example) The rear seat belt status indicator is available only in certain countries. The rear seat belt status indicator informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. Cancelling the rear seat belt status indicator immediately (Y page 216). Airbags Introduction The airbag installation location is identified by the label AIRBAG. An airbag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. It is not a substitute for seat belts. The airbag provides additional protection in the corresponding accident situations. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The various airbag systems work independently of one another (Y page 51). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. Due to the required speed of the airbag after deployment, it is also not possible to entirely rule out the risk of injuries caused by the airbag. Important safety notes G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, including pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the airbags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The centre of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RAlways secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is travelling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 1.50 m tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. ROnly secure a child to the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front airbag is Occupant safety G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front airbags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. When deployed, the front airbags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front airbag (Y page 40). The front-passenger front airbag will deploy only if: Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 47). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 47) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Z Safety disabled, and only then in a rearward-facing child restraint system. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled (Y page 40). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 47) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54) in addition to the manufacturer's operating and installation instructions for the child restraint system. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. 45 46 Occupant safety Safety Driver's kneebag Driver's knee airbag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee airbag is triggered together with the front airbags. The driver's knee airbag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat. i The driver's knee airbag is available only in certain countries. Sidebags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. Operation of the automatic co-driver's front airbag deactivation system may also be impaired. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the sidebag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the sidebag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Ran occupant is detected in the frontpassenger seat or Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the sidebag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Windowbags Windowbags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the windowbag offers additional head protection. However, it does not protect the thorax or arms. In the event of a side impact, the windowbag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that it can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat Occupant safety belt, a windowbag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 51). 47 Operation of automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation In order to recognise a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system categorises the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front airbag is either enabled or disabled. If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted to the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up after the system self-test and remain lit. The frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. The system does not disable: Rthe sidebag Rthe windowbag Rthe seat belt tensioner Make sure that your vehicle is equipped with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 57). If this is not the case, always install a child restraint system on a suitable rear seat (Y page 59). If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of a forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, rest flat against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then is the correct function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system guaranteed. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Safety Introduction : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out a self-diagnosis. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag: RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, then both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the frontpassenger front airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front airbag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an airbag display message appears on the instrument cluster (Y page 226). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front airbag both before and during the journey. Z Safety 48 Occupant safety If a person sits in the passenger seat, he/she must be: Rseated with the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with his/her back against the seat backrest Rwith his/her feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system may be influenced, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers his/her weight by supporting himself/herself on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that his/her weight is raised from the seat cushion The front-passenger front airbag may be disabled by mistake as a result of these or similar actions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up permanently. The front-passenger front airbag then does not deploy during an accident. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always make sure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and that the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver's seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver's front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always make sure that the codriver's front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 50). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Always observe the vehicle-specific information for the correct positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 59). If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system detects that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front airbag is disabled. But in the case of a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can also go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child in a forward-facing child restraint system, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification, or it goes out. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 57) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 59). Alternatively, you can fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person with a small stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person with a smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with the stature of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 54). If the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp on the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only a child restraint system that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high decelerZ 49 Safety Occupant safety Safety 50 Occupant safety ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front airbag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat. Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. This could result in the front-passenger front airbag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardsfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the rear reclining seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 47). If the front-passenger front airbag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Further information can be found under "Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 50). Problems with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 49). Occupant safety Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is false. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person lights up and remains lit, on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 47). even though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpassenger seat is occupassenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a perX Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sysson with a build corretem checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. sponding to that of an adult. The PASSENGER AIR The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system is BAG OFF indicator lamp malfunctioning. does not light up and/or X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child restraint does not stay on. system. The front-passenger seat X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on is: the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Rempty X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. Roccupied with a rearX When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat ward-facing child belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you fit the child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Deployment of belt tensioners and airbags Important safety notes G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have been triggered are no longer operational and therefore cannot protect as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small Z Safety Problem 51 Safety 52 Occupant safety amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the seat belt tensioners in the event of a head-on or rear collision. A seat belt tensioner can be triggered only if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 40) Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat The seat belt tensioners in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a high-severity accident, in certain head-on collisions, additional components of the restraint system are deployed independently of each other: RFront airbags and driver's kneebag RWindowbag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt On vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag is either disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front airbag can be deployed in an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 40). Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. In the first deployment stage, the front airbag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed if the second deployment stage is activated within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold for the seat belt tensioners and airbags is determined based on the evaluation of the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment process should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors that can be seen and measured only after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts that are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the applicable components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other. RSidebags on the side on which an impact occurs, independently of the seat belt tensioner and seat belt usage Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: the sidebag Occupant safety i Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. How the airbag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision Rside impact PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Introduction In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Although your vehicle is equipped with PRESAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Rwhen active Brake Assist intervenes powerfully PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. Rvehicles with the memory function: the frontpassenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Information about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 43). Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures may be implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system: automatic emergency call Z Safety on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - an occupant is detected in the frontpassenger seat or - the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindowbag on the side on which an impact occurs, independently of seat belt usage and regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied RSeat belt tensioners, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection for the vehicle occupants in this situation 53 54 Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Safety Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front seats. For this reason, MercedesBenz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system (Y page 47). G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 41) and the notes on how to use the seat belt properly (Y page 42). Child restraint system If you fit a rearward-facing child restraint system on the centre rear seat, the rear seat armrest must be folded back as far as it will go. Be sure to observe the correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 59). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use a child restraint system recommended by Mercedes-Benz (Y page 63). G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting Children in the vehicle G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 268). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. observe the notes on "Child restraint systems on the co-driver's seat" (Y page 57). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain information at a qualified specialist workshop. ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protection for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg, who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system (Y page 59) and the installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used as provided by the manufacturer . Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or iSize securing rings. Securing systems for child restraint systems include: Rthe seat belt system Rthe ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings RTop Tether anchorage points If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system on the co-driver's seat, be sure to Z Safety on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. 55 Safety 56 Children in the vehicle This symbol indicates an ISOFIX position that is suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system. A similar symbol can be found on the ISOFIX child restraint system. ; i-Size securing rings X or X This symbol indicates an i‑Size position that is suitable for attaching an i-Size child restraint system. A similar symbol can be found on the iSize child restraint system. ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged. Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings : or i-Size securing rings ;. Install the i-Size child restraint system on both i-Size securing rings ;. ISOFIX and i-Size are standardised securing systems for special child restraint systems. ISOFIX child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R-44. i-Size child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R-129. Only child restraint systems that have been approved in accordance with ECE R-44 may be attached to ISOFIX securing rings. ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with ECE R-44 and i‑Size child restraint systems that have been approved in accordance with ECE R-129 may be attached to i-Size securing rings. ISOFIX securing ring : or i-Size securing ring ; are installed on the left and right sides of the rear seats. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is fitted with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes : ISOFIX securing rings G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci- Children in the vehicle If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible (Y page 271). Top Tether anchorages Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: X X Move head restraint : upwards. Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: X or X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route Top Tether belt A centrally over head restraint :. Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route one Top Tether belt A to the left and one to the right past the side of head restraint :. All vehicles: Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Ensure that: RTop Tether hook ? is hooked into Top Tether anchorage = as shown RTop Tether belt A is not twisted RTop Tether belt A is routed between the rear seat backrest and the luggage compartment cover if the luggage compartment cover is fitted X X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: X The Top Tether anchorage points are fitted in the rear compartment behind the outer head restraints on the parcel shelf. X Press down the rear of cover ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover ; is raised slightly at the front. X Fold cover ; upwards. If necessary, move head restraint : back down again slightly. Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Z Safety dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. 57 Safety 58 Children in the vehicle Vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system: if it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on the "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 47). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ra child restraint system that is not detected by the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system Runintentional disabling of the front-passenger front airbag Runsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Please observe the warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor; see illustration. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver's seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver's front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always make sure that the codriver's front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit, the front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 40). Vehicles without the automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle is not equipped with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the frontpassenger side. The sticker is visible when you open the front-passenger door. If you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up briefly. However, they have no function and do not indicate that there is an automatic frontpassenger front airbag deactivation system. In this case, never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat (Y page 59). Observe the following information under "Rearward-facing child restraint system" (Y page 58) and "Forward-facing child restraint system" (Y page 59) as well as information on the suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 59). Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (Y page 40) is the frontpassenger front airbag disabled. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Children in the vehicle 59 If it is absolutely necessary to fit a forwardfacing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the information on suitable positioning of the child restraint system (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Introduction Only child restraint systems approved in accordance with ECE standards ECE R44 or ECE R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) are permitted for use in the vehicle. For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system may not be possible due to possible contact with the roof. "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label and the text "Universal" or an "i-Size" label. Safety Forward-facing child restraint system Example: approval label on the child restraint system ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems of the “Universal“ category can be used on seats labelled U, UF, IUF or i-U in accordance with the following tables: RSuitability of the seats for attaching beltsecured child restraint systems RSuitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems RSuitability of the seats for attaching an i-Size child restraint system Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "semi-universal" on the approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat – if it is absolutely necessary to secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat: X Always pay attention to the instructions under "Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat" (Y page 57). There you will find instructions on how to correctly route the shoulder belt strap from the Z Safety 60 Children in the vehicle vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system (Y page 59). X Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, you must also move the front-passenger seat to the highest position. X Move the backrest to an almost vertical position. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X If possible, move the seat cushion angle to the highest, most vertical position (Y page 98). Suitability of the seats for attaching a belt-secured child restraint system If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible (Y page 100). The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system may not be possible due to possible contact with the roof. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 54) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system, you must replace the head restraints again immediately (Y page 99). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X Seat that is unsuitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (Y page 63). Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Children in the vehicle Front-passenger seat Rear seat Frontpassenger front airbag enabled Frontpassenger front airbag disabled1 Left, right Centre2 0 up to 10 kg X U, L U, L U, L 0+ up to 13 kg X U, L U, L U, L I 9 kg to 18 kg UF, L U, L U, L U, L II 15 kg to 25 kg U, L U, L U, L X III 22 kg to 36 kg U, L U, L U, L X Safety Weight category 61 Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible (Y page 100). The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, this can mean that the area of use is restricted. The maximum size setting of the child restraint system may not be possible due to possible contact with the roof. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 54) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system, you must replace the head restraints again immediately (Y page 99). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight category and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the "Universal" category and are approved for use in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the "Recommended child restraint systems" table (Y page 63). The manufacturer will also recommend a suitable ISOFIX child restraint system. For this, your vehicle and the seat must be listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's model list. For more information, contact the child restraint system manufacturer or visit their website. The vehicle is equipped with an automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 2 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. 1 Z Children in the vehicle 62 Weight category Safety Carry cot Size category Equipment Rear seat left, right F ISO/L1 X G ISO/L2 X 0 up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 IL 0+ up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 IL D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL3 D ISO/R2 IL C ISO/R3 IL3 B ISO/F2 IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF A ISO/F3 IUF I 9 kg to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraint position accordingly. Also observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Suitability of the seats for attaching an i-Size child restraint system If you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+ or a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat, you must adjust the driver's or front-passenger seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. If you use a category I, forward-facing child restraint system, you should remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible (Y page 100). The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat. Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. Always observe the notes in the "Child restraint system" section (Y page 54) and the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When you remove the child restraint system, you must replace the head restraints again immediately (Y page 99). All vehicle occupants must adjust their head restraints correctly before beginning the journey. Legend for the table: X Seat that is unsuitable for i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. i‑U Suitable for a forward or rearward-facing i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. 3 If you are using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), make sure that the front seat backrest does not rest against the child restraint system. Children in the vehicle 63 Seat Left Centre Right X i‑U X i‑U i‑Size child restraint systems Rear seat Safety Frontpassenger seat Recommended child restraint systems General notes Always observe the information in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 57) and in "Suitable positioning of the child restraint system" (Y page 59). You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt 4 Weight category Manufacturer Type Approval number(E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...)4 Category 0: up to10 kg up to approximately6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 Category 0+: up to13 kg up to approximately15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 Group I: 9 kgto18 kg between approximately 9 monthsand 4 years Britax Römer DUO plus 03 301133 970 16 00 970 37 00 Group II/III: 15 kgto36 kg between approximately4and 12 years Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 19 00 970 38 00 Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301304 970 61 00 Colour code 9H95. Z Children in the vehicle 64 Safety Recommended "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems Weight category Size cat- Manufacturer Type egory Approval number (E1 ...) Order number4 Category 0+: up to13 kg E Category I: B1 9 kgto18 kg Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224 Britax Römer DUO plus 04 301133 A 000 970 16 00 A 000 970 37 00 Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are travelling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: rear doors (Y page 65) Rthe rear side windows (Y page 65) Rthe G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (particularly children) unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. 4 Colour code 9H95. Driving safety systems Child-proof locks for the rear doors X To enable/disable: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate You can secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof lock is working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal transport box. Driving safety systems Driving safety systems overview In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 66) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 66) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67) RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 69) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 69) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 72) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 73) Z Safety If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 65 66 Driving safety systems Safety Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described work as effectively as possible only when there is adequate contact between the tyres and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tyres, recommended minimum tyre tread depths etc. (Y page 310). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. tivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 250) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 217). Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions; this serves as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General notes ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deac- BAS (Brake Assist) General notes BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Read the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Driving safety systems Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X Active Brake Assist General information i Read the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and braking assistance appropriate to the situation. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with the vehicle travelling in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist supports you with braking assistance appropriate to the situation. Important safety notes Detection of hazardous situations can be particularly impaired by: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in multistorey car parks Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after servicing is carried out on the Active Brake Assist system Read the important safety notes in the "Running-in notes" section (Y page 132). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where no visible damage to the front of the vehicle is apparent. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition cycle. You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist (Y page 209) in the on-board computer. When the system is deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimise the risk of collision with the vehicle in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, you will be warned visually and audibly. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 66). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. Z Safety Braking 67 68 Driving safety systems In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. Safety Rnot Function The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds: Rof approximately 30 km/h or more if, over several seconds, the distance to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for the driving speed. The · distance warning lamp will then light up on the instrument cluster. Rof approximately 7 km/h or more if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up on the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, certain complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R7–105 km/h for moving objects R7 - 50 km/h for stationary objects Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R7 - 200 km/h for moving objects R7 - 50 km/h for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the autonomous braking function to engage. If the autonomous braking function demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 53). Braking assistance appropriate to the situation General information i Read the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). With the help of the radar sensor system, Adaptive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, the braking assistance adapts to the situation and automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic situation. Braking assistance appropriate to the situation provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 7 km/h. It uses the radar sensor system to assess the traffic situation. Braking assistance appropriate to the situation is capable of reacting to moving objects which have already been recognised as such at least once over the period of observation, up to vehicle speeds of around 250 km/h. Driving safety systems Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 66). G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. The risk of an accident remains. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene The risk of an accident remains. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot Due to the nature of the system, complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Active Brake Assist to intervene. Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system is still available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. Adaptive brake lights The adaptive brake lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation by: Rflashing brake lamps Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning button (Y page 109). ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. Z Safety Braking assistance appropriate to the situation can also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle speeds of around 70 km/h. If braking assistance appropriate to the situation demands particularly high brake pressure, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered simultaneously (Y page 53). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal Ra danger of collision with the vehicle in front no longer exists Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle Braking assistance appropriate to the situation is then deactivated. 69 70 Driving safety systems ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Safety tion (Y page 66). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, e.g. if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. ESP® Drive on carefully. Have checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important that you observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 306). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Read the information on warning lamps (Y page 252) and display messages that may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 217). Use only wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before you begin the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes on the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X When pulling away, depress the accelerator pedal only as far as is necessary. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Activating/deactivating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Read the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). You can select between the following ESP® statuses: RESP® RESP® is activated is deactivated G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. The spinning of the wheels results in a cut for better traction on loose surfaces. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen snow chains are used Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle Driving safety systems Activating/deactivating ESP® G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the onboard computer (Y page 209). ESP®deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. ESP®activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. G WARNING Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels may start to spin Rtraction control is still activated RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Rengine If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen snow chains are used Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires a highly qualified and experienced driver. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes Activating/deactivating ESP® i Read the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). You can select between the following ESP® statuses: RESP® is activated handling mode is activated RESP® is deactivated ESP® is activated every time the engine is started, regardless of whether ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off. RSPORT X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. The Z Safety if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. 71 Driving safety systems 72 SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. Safety X Characteristics when SPORT handling mode is activated If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp on the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP® improves driving stability only to a limited degree Rtraction control is still activated Rthe engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels may start to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cut for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels may start to spin The spinning of the wheels results in a cut for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated Rengine RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; it is not activated even if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP® RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilisation General notes If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilised. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of approximately 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General notes EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes Protection against theft i Read the "Important safety notes" section Immobiliser (Y page 66). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 250) as well as display messages (Y page 219). The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate with the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 172) and hill start assist (Y page 136). ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) STEER CONTROL General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering support is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle begins to skid Important safety notes i Read the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning steering is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. Rthe To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the emergency key element Rthe boot lid Rthe bonnet Z 73 Safety Protection against theft Protection against theft 74 X or To stop the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. The alarm stops. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm stops. Safety X X or To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm stops. Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm stops. The alarm does not switch off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. Rthe doors are closed boot lid is closed Only then is tow-away protection activated. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is activated after approximately 60 seconds. Rthe Switching off X or X X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Insert the key into the ignition lock. Tow-away protection is switched off automatically. Deactivating i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Centre. This is done by means of a text message or a data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system Rthe Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system has been activated properly Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available Tow-away protection Function An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This can occur if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. Switching on X Make sure that: X or Remove the key from the ignition lock. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. Tow-away protection is deactivated. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again Ra door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again X Protection against theft Deactivating Safety To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away protection if you lock your vehicle and it: Ris being transported Ris being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a splitlevel garage Interior motion sensor Function When the interior motion sensor is switched on, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior. This can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for example. Switching on Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim This will prevent false alarms. X Make sure that: Rthe doors are closed Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed Rthe boot lid is closed Only then is the interior motion sensor activated. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. X Switching off X or X or X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESSGO. Insert the key into the ignition lock. Press the Start/Stop button. The key must be in the vehicle. The interior motion sensor is automatically switched off. 75 X or Remove the key from the ignition lock. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes several times in rapid succession. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO. The interior motion sensor is deactivated. The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until: Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and Ra door is opened and closed again and Rthe vehicle is locked again To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and: Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle Rthe panorama sliding sunroof remains open Rthe side windows remain open X i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a double-lock function. The doors cannot be opened from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key (Y page 83). Deactivate the interior motion sensor before you lock the vehicle with the key. The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside with the key. Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 83). Z 76 Key Key Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Opening and closing Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 75). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). Key functions ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the key in the boot. Otherwise, the key : & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens the boot lid = % Unlocks the vehicle If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle locks again Rprotection against theft is reactivated Key To lock: press the & button. The key centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe boot lid Rthe fuel filler flap During unlocking, the turn signals flash once. During locking, they flash three times. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it also lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control (see the separate operating instructions). You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated or deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 211). X To open the boot lid automatically: press and hold the F button until the boot lid opens (Y page 87). KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in the vehicle. Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Rwhen To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 90). X Locking and unlocking You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you need to carry the key with you. You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions with the functions of a conventional key. Unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the key. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 1 m. A check that periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in or in the direct vicinity of the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rduring engine start Rduring driving X To unlock the boot lid: pull boot lid handle :. Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for an extended period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-GO. The key will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation or deactivation, the vehicle does not have to be nearby. Z Opening and closing X 77 Key 78 To deactivate: press the & button on the key twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the key flashes twice briefly and lights up once; KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 79). X To activate: press any button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all its associated features are available again. Opening and closing X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X KEYLESS-GO start function General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a key in the vehicle. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for about six seconds until the battery indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 79). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The key now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 79). Emergency key element General notes If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). There are several ways to deactivate the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle. or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The key must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key into the ignition lock. Key Removing the emergency key element environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Inserting the emergency key element X Push emergency key element ; completely into the key until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Battery of the key Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Replace the battery (Y page 79). i If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). X Z Opening and closing Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and, at the same time, remove emergency key element ; from the key. Further information about: RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 85) RUnlocking the boot (Y page 88) RLocking the vehicle (Y page 85) X 79 Key 80 Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contamination. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 79). X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. Opening and closing X Press emergency key element ; into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X Key 81 Problems with the key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. X If this does not work: X Check the key battery (Y page 79) and replace if necessary (Y page 79). X Unlock (Y page 85) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X If this does not work: Unlock (Y page 85) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X The key is faulty. Unlock (Y page 85) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X You can no longer lock or The key battery is weak or discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the key battery (Y page 79) and replace if necessary KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 79). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 85) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 85) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Z Opening and closing The key battery is weak or discharged. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. 82 Key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO. Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked even using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 85) or lock (Y page 85) the vehicle using the emergency key element. X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Opening and closing X The engine cannot be started using the key. The on-board voltage is too low. Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 301). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. Stop button. The key is in the vehicle. The key battery is weak or discharged. X Check the key battery (Y page 79) and replace if necessary (Y page 79). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock. X You have lost a key. Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X You have lost the emergency key element. X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. Stow luggage or loads preferably in the luggage compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268). United Kingdom only: G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 75). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). Unlocking and opening the doors from the inside ! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door to close. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window. When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window is raised again. Pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. For all countries except the United Kingdom: You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). United Kingdom only: X G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get Z Opening and closing Doors 83 Doors 84 Opening and closing out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsupervised in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 75). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If all the doors and the boot lid are closed, the vehicle locks. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO. For all countries except the United Kingdom: X X You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door that has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had previously been unlocked. Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle has been locked with the key, the double lock function is activated as standard. It is then not possible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. You can deactivate the double lock function by deactivating the interior motion sensor (Y page 75). The doors can then be opened from the inside after the vehicle has been locked from the outside. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). The anti-theft alarm system is triggered if the door is opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 73). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be observed if the vehicle has been: Rlocked with the locking button for the central locking or Rlocked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. Only the door that has been opened from the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had previously been unlocked. Doors 85 Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. The door is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 79). X To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed Rthe vehicle is being towed Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer You can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking function using the on-board computer (Y page 211). X Unlocking the driver's door (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 73). X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Locking the vehicle (emergency key element) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key element. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid. X Press the locking button on the driver’s door (Y page 84). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press the locking knobs down by hand if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the emergency key element out of the key (Y page 78). X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Z Opening and closing Automatic locking feature Boot 86 Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. Opening and closing ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid are locked. X Insert the emergency key element into the key (Y page 79). X i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 333). Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268). Do not leave the key in the boot. If you do so, you could lock yourself out. The boot lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside Ropened automatically from outside Ropened automatically from inside Remergency released from the inside. Opening/closing from outside Opening Boot Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. Never drive with the boot lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Press the % button on the key. Pull handle :. X Raise the boot lid. X X Boot Closing 87 ensure that you only make a leg movement within the detection range of sensors. of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the boot lid opening unintentionally: Rusing a car wash Rusing a high-pressure cleaner Make sure that the key is at least 3 m away from the vehicle. i You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. FurPull down the boot lid using handle :. X Let the boot lid drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO. X Opening automatically from outside General notes ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. i The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 333). Opening automatically You can open the boot lid automatically using the key or the handle in the boot lid. X Press and hold the F button on the key until the boot lid opens. or X If the boot lid is unlocked, pull the boot lid handle and release it again immediately. ther information on deactivating and activating KEYLESS-GO (Y page 77). General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open the boot lid without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key with you. The key must be in the KEYLESS-GO detection range to the rear of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. HANDS-FREE ACCESS Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury. Always RAlways ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 30 cm away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. Z Opening and closing ! If the key is within the rear detection range Boot 88 Opening and closing RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function dur- ing engine start. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. Using HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is in the KEYLESS-GO detection range to the rear of the vehicle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The boot lid could thus be opened unintentionally, for example, when you: - fold the ball coupling in or out - couple or uncouple a trailer - fit or remove a rear-mounted bicycle rack - load/unload bicycles on/from a rearmounted bicycle rack - set down or lift up an object behind the vehicle - polish the rear of the vehicle Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key with you in such situations. This will prevent the unintentional opening of the boot lid. Opening automatically from inside General notes ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 333). Opening You can open the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Operation X To open: pull remote operating switch : for the boot lid until the boot lid opens. Boot emergency release General notes ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. X To open: kick into sensor detection range : below the bumper with your foot. If the boot lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then kick under the bumper once again. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the boot lid does not open. Repeat the kicking movement more quickly if this occurs. X Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the boot lid. The opening dimensions of the boot lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 333). If the boot lid can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the key, or Rusing the remote operating switch in the door control panel: Use the emergency release on the inside of the boot lid. You can reach the emergency release via the boot. Side windows Opening 89 Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Fold the rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 271). X Insert a suitable tool ;, e.g. a screwdriver, into opening : in the cover. The boot lid is released. X Open the boot lid. X Side windows The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from travelling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Important safety notes Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- G WARNING Rwhile While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. gers resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Z Opening and closing Side window reversing feature Side windows Opening and closing 90 : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding button. X To open fully: press the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. X To close fully: pull the button beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling again. X i You can continue to operate the side win- dows after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until the driver's or frontpassenger door is opened. i The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 65). Convenience opening feature Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESSGO start function, Exclusive package or AMG Exclusive package: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. The key can also be used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the key. The "Convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked. X Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG Exclusive package but without KEYLESSGO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for the following operations, point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: the key must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the panorama sunroof are in the desired position. If the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. X Press and hold the % button once more until the panorama sliding sunroof reaches the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Side windows 91 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESSGO start function, Exclusive package or AMG Exclusive package: at the same time you can: Rlock the vehicle Rclose the side windows Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, you can then close the roller sunblind. for: Rthe side windows (Y page 89) Rthe panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 93) Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 94) Using the key Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG Exclusive package but without KEYLESSGO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for the following operations, point the tip of the key at the door handle on the driver's door. The key must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: the key must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Press and hold the & button again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used must both be closed. The key must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the key and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 1 m. Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed. i Make sure you touch only recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows are closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof are closed. X On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof closes. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 89). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the X Z Opening and closing i Notes on the automatic reversing function 92 Panorama sliding sunroof side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Problems with the side windows Opening and closing G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature. Panorama sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, press the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Panorama sliding sunroof ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Operating the panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Reversing feature of the sliding sunroof In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is, however, only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man- ually immediately after automatic reversing : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama sliding sunroof can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again. After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. Z Opening and closing G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. 93 Opening and closing 94 Panorama sliding sunroof At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The sliding sunroof raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the key. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof carrier is fitted. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. If contact is made with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers slightly but remains raised at the rear. Rain-closing feature when the engine is switched off The rain-closing feature is only available for vehicles with a rain sensor. When the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or is removed, the panorama sliding sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter six hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed when being closed by the rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated. The panorama sliding sunroof does not close if: Rit is raised at the rear. Rit is blocked. Rno rain is falling on the area of the windscreen being monitored by the rain sensor. If, for example, the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport, the field of the sensor may be covered. Rain-closing feature when driving The raised panorama sliding sunroof automatically lowers when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed and Rthe intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the panorama sliding sunroof again, press the 3 button in direction :. The rainclosing feature remains activated. Operating the roller sunblind for the panorama sliding sunroof Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone is trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process The opening/closing process is stopped. The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblind is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is, however, only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the roller sunblind. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man- ually immediately after automatic reversing Panorama sliding sunroof This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep. If someone is trapped: Rrelease 95 Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind the switch immediately or automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Opening and closing : To open ; To open = To close Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling again. After opening the panorama sliding sunroof, the roller sunblind automatically closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the vehicle interior. X Reset the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind if the panorama sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the roller sunblind is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Problems with the panorama sliding sunroof G WARNING If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the reversing function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Z Opening and closing Rpress the switch in any direction during the 96 Panorama sliding sunroof Opening and closing In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The panorama sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The panorama sliding sunroof is closed with more force. If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. The panorama sliding sunroof is closed without the automatic reversing feature. Seats G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Ryou have a good overview of traffic conditions Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and must be routed across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area Further related subjects: RAdjusting the seats manually (Y page 98) RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 99) RAdjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 102) RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 43) RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (Y page 103) RVehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 106) Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible are sitting in an upright position Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly Ryou If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 44) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 54). Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Correct driver's seat position 97 98 Seats G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it could unexpectedly move while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always ensure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i Further related subjects: RLuggage compartment enlargement (folding down the rear seats) (Y page 271) Adjusting the seats manually Vehicles without the seating comfort package Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release lever : again. Ensure that the seat engages audibly. Backrest angle: X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. Seat height: X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seats Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or rearwards. X Release lever : again. Ensure that the seat engages audibly. Backrest angle: X Relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards. Seat height: X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seat cushion angle: X Adjust the angle so that your thighs have gentle support. X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. Seat cushion length: X Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the seat cushion forwards or backwards. X Release lever ; again. The seat cushion engages. Adjusting the seats electrically : ; = ? Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 106). Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The head restraints cannot provide the intended protection unless they are fitted and adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk of injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or sudden braking, for example. Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Ensure that the centre of the head restraints support the back of each vehicle occupant's head at eye level before driving off. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Vehicles with the seating comfort package 99 Seats 100 Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. General notes For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust the front head restraints or the outer rear head restraints. Adjusting the head restraints manually Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the head restraint height This function allows you to adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. There are a number of detents. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards. X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aft position To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. X Removing and fitting the rear seat head restraints The rear head restraints on the outer seats can be removed and refitted. For vehicles with sports seats the rear head restraints cannot be removed and refitted. Seats 101 AMG Performance Seat Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats: to adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats. Fold the seat backrest slightly forwards in order to remove the head restraint (Y page 271). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release button : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion narrower: press button :. X To set the side bolsters of the seat cushion wider: press button ;. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat backrest X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest narrower: press button =. X To set the side bolsters of the seat backrest wider: press button ?. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating repeatedly. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X 102 Steering wheel Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. i If the vehicle battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumswitched off prematurely ers are switched on. or cannot be switched X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the on. rear window heating or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. Steering wheel Important safety notes When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Adjusting the steering wheel Radjust G WARNING the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. Mirrors 103 Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up as far as it will go. The steering column is locked. X Check that the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. Mirrors the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. Rear-view mirror Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button ;. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button :. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior X X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzle switch : forwards or back. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust Mirrors 104 mirror using button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press button = up, down, or to the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated at low outside temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i The exterior mirrors can also be heated manually by switching on the rear window heating. Folding the exterior mirrors in/out electrically Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Briefly press button :. X Folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 213): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. Otherwise, they could vibrate. i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 213). If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position (forwards or backwards), proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: manually move the exterior mirror into the correct position. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button (Y page 104) until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 103). Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass of an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. Mirrors 105 If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: Rimmediately The "Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirror package". The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. : Button for the exterior mirror on the driver's side ; Button for the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side = Button for the exterior mirror setting ? Memory button M Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press button ;. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the default parking position. X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the front-passenger side exterior mirror returns to the driving position. X X Calling up a stored parking position Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mirror using the corresponding button (Y page 103). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 15 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior mirror on the driver's side X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors rinse off electrolyte from your skin with water. Rimmediately and thoroughly rinse electrolyte out of eyes using clean water. Rif electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Rif electrolyte comes into contact with skin or eyes or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Rimmediately change out of clothing that has been in contact with electrolyte. Rif an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 106 Memory function Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, the adjustments could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side while the vehicle is stationary. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING If the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. If someone becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment is stopped. G WARNING If children activate the memory function, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock. Storing settings Using the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat and backrest position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Adjust the seat (Y page 99). Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side (Y page 103). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected memory position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant preset position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Exterior lighting Exterior lighting 3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- General notes 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped beam It is not necessary to switch your headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered. Legal requirements are fulfilled without switching the headlamps to symmetrical dipped beam. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch Rcombination switch (Y page 109) Rheadlamp range adjustment (only vehicles with halogen headlamps) (Y page 108) Ron-board computer (Y page 211) Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand parking lamps 2 X Right-hand parking lamps ment cluster lighting by the light sensor 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps B R Rear foglamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the à position. The exterior lighting (except the side lamps or parking lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the key in position 0 in the ignition lock Automatic headlamp mode à is the preferred light switch position. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on light conditions. RWith the engine running: depending on the ambient light conditions, the daytime driving lights or the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to the à position. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. The daytime driving lights improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. If the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green indicator lamps T Z Lights and windscreen wipers For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. 107 108 Exterior lighting (side lamps) and L (dipped-beam headlamps) in the instrument cluster light up. Dipped-beam headlamps Lights and windscreen wipers When the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the L position, the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps are switched on even if the light sensor does not sense dark ambient light conditions. This is advantageous when there is fog or rain. X To switch on the dipped-beam headlamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. Parking lamps Switching on the parking lamps ensures that the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key should not be in the ignition lock or it should be in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) Rear foglamp The rear foglamp improves the visibility of your vehicle in heavy fog for the following traffic. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear foglamps. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear foglamp:press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i When the rear foglamp is switched on, the centre brake lamp in the tail lamp switches off due to a legal requirement. Side lamps ! When the battery is discharged heavily, the side lamps or parking lamps are automatically switched off to facilitate an engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T side lamps for periods lasting several hours. Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied 1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and rear seats occupied, luggage compartment laden 3 Driver's and front-passenger seat occupied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer The headlamp range controller allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. X Start the engine. X Turn the headlamp range controller to the position that corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Exterior lighting To indicate briefly:press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the main-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The main-beam headlamps only switch on in the à position if the dipped-beam headlamps are on. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the main-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 109). X To switch on the headlamp flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Hazard warning lamps To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button :. X The hazard warning lamps switch on automatically if: Ran airbag has been triggered or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps continue to operate even if the ignition is switched off. Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to switch automatically between dipped beam and main beam. The system recognises vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or travelling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from main beam to dipped beam. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it switches on the main-beam headlamps again. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Z Lights and windscreen wipers Combination switch 109 Interior lighting 110 Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users that have lights, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the main-beam headlamps in good time. Lights and windscreen wipers Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or if the sensors are obscured If you are driving at speeds below 25 km/h or other road users are recognised or the roads are adequately lit: the main-beam headlamps are switched off automatically The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To deactivate:move the combination switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display goes out. Headlamps misted up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the dipped-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 30 km/h and no other road users are recognised: The main-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. X : p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on or off ; c Switches the front interior lighting on = v Switches the rear interior lighting on/ off ? | Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off A p Switches the right-hand front reading lamp on or off B Switches the automatic interior lighting con- trol on Replacing bulbs Rear compartment control panel 111 Replacing bulbs Important safety notes : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off ; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The colour and brightness for the ambient lighting may be set via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). Automatic interior lighting control To switch on: set the switch to centre position B. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated for a short time when the key is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see separate Owner's Manual). X Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been designed for this purpose. Fit only spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulb. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 112). Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb does not light up either, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Headlamps and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with LED headlamps: the light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace your vehicle's bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop with the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Z Lights and windscreen wipers G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. 112 Replacing bulbs Overview of bulb types Lights and windscreen wipers You can replace the following bulbs. The details for the bulb types can be found in the legend. Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W ; Main-beam headlamp/daytime driving lamp/side lamp/parking lamp: H15 55 W/ 15 W = Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Replacing front bulbs Fitting/removing the cover on the front wheel arch You must remove the cover in the front wheel arch before you can change the front turn signal lamp. X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is released. X Push cover ; down. X To fit:push cover ; up. X Turn rotary knob : through 90°. Cover ; is locked. Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : Rear foglamp: P 21 W ; Brake lamp: W 16 W = Brake lamp: W 16 W ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W A Reversing lamp: W 16 W Remove the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 112). X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Replacing bulbs X Main-beam headlamps/daytime driving lights/side lamps and parking lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull out. X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X X Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps) Turn the bulb anti-clockwise and pull it out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replacing rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels View of right-hand side trim panel You must open the side trim panel in the boot before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. X To open: release right or left side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the boot. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 113). X X Switch off the lights. Open the bonnet. X Turn bulb holder : anticlockwise and pull out. X X Z Lights and windscreen wipers Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 112). X 113 Windscreen wipers 114 Lights and windscreen wipers Press retaining clips : at the same time in the direction of the arrows. X Carefully remove the bulb holder together with the connected plug and the bulbs. X ! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on Bulb holder ; Brake lamp = Brake lamp ? Rear fog lamp A Reversing light B Turn signal Combination switch 1 $ Windscreen wipers off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set Brake lamp and reversing lamp: remove the corresponding bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Rear foglamp and turn signal: press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn it anticlockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the bulb holder and engage on retaining clips :. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 113). X Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windscreen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. the windscreen after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, this may be due to wax or other residue. Clean the windscreen with washer fluid after an automatic car wash. to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î wipes the wind- screen using washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- screen becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windscreen wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen will no longer be wiped properly. This could mean you are unable to observe the traffic conditions. Windscreen wipers 115 Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes ! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. ! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen. Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen. Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the windscreen may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Removing the wiper blades Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: switch off the engine. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Fitting the wiper blades X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Z Lights and windscreen wipers G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Windscreen wipers 116 Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Lights and windscreen wipers X Remove protective film : of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. If the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. X i The duration of the colour change varies depending on the usage conditions. Problems with the windscreen wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wipers fail completely. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. zles no longer hits the centre of the windscreen. Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. Otherwise, the windows could mist up. To prevent the windows from misting up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Ractivate air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on "Cooling with air dehumidification" Ractivate the "Windscreen demisting" function briefly, if required The air-conditioning system or THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances from the air. The air-conditioning system or THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and panorama sliding sunroof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 126). Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the side panelling clear (Y page 113). Otherwise the vehicle will not be ventilated correctly. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 90). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most parti- cles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. With THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control, gaseous pollutants and odours will also be reduced. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As this depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. i Vehicles with auxiliary heating: Under certain environmental conditions, the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the ignition key has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The blue LED on the rocker switch in the centre console lights up when the active function to dry the automatic climate control is on. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Vehicles without auxiliary heating: Under certain environmental conditions, the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the ignition key has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Climate control Overview of climate control systems 117 118 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for air-conditioning system : ; = ? A B C To set the temperature (Y page 122) To demist the windscreen (Y page 123) To set the air distribution (Y page 122) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 124) To set the airflow (Y page 123) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 121) To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 124) Notes on using the air-conditioning system Air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of tips and recommendations for optimum use of the air-conditioning system. RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turning control knob A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). RSet the temperature to 22 †. RRecommendation for avoiding misted windows at low exterior temperatures or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehumidification function (Y page 121). Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible switch off P and O (Y page 122). Deactivate air-recirculation mode e (Y page 124). Set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 123). RRecommendation for rapid cooling or heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set airflow control A to a setting between 3 and 6 (Y page 123). RRecommendation for a constant vehicle interior temperature: set airflow control A to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 123). RRecommendation for air distribution in winter: select the O and ¯ settings (Y page 122). Recommendation for air distribution in summer: select the P or P and ¯ settings (Y page 122). RUse the "Windscreen demisting" function only briefly until the windscreen is clear again. RUse air-recirculation mode only briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at Overview of climate control systems DYNAMIC SELECT button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 141). If you have selected drive program E: Depending on the configuration, the climate settings can also be influenced in drive program I. If you have selected drive program C or S, the climate settings are not affected. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control operates only at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 138). Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and in the warming-up phase heat output is reduced Rthe rear window heating running time is reduced Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (2-zone) : ; = ? A B C D E F G H To set the temperature, left (Y page 122) To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 121) To demist the windscreen (Y page 123) To increase the airflow (Y page 123) To set the air distribution (Y page 122) Display To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 124) To switch the climate control on/off (Y page 120) To set the temperature, right (Y page 122) To switch the residual heat on/off (Y page 126) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 121) To reduce the airflow (Y page 123) Climate control the bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display (see separate operating instructions). You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. 119 120 Operating the climate control system I To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 124) J To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123) Climate control Information on using THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. RUse the "Windscreen demisting" function only briefly until the windscreen is clear again. RUse air-recirculation mode only briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can be activated or deactivated only with the ignition switched off. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display (see separate operating instructions). You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. DYNAMIC SELECT button (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 141). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and in the warming-up phase heat output is reduced Rthe rear window heating running time is reduced Depending on the configuration, the climate settings can also be influenced in drive program I. If you have selected drive program C or S, the climate settings are not affected. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control operates only at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 138). Operating the climate control system Switching the climate control on/off General notes When climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could mist up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly. Air-conditioning system Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to the desired position (except position 0) (Y page 118). X To switch off: turn control A anti-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 118). X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: switch on climate control primarily using the à button. Activating/deactivating cooling with dehumidification not be cooled during warm weather. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is available only when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating X Press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up or goes out. The indicator lamp in the button indicates that the respective function is activated. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactivated ¿ button flashes due to a malfunction. three times or remains X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. off. The cooling with air dehumidification function cannot be activated. Setting climate control to automatic mode General notes Only THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control features the "Control climate control automatically" function. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode. 121 Climate control Operating the climate control system Operating the climate control system 122 Setting climate control to automatic mode Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X To switch to manual mode: press the É or Ë button. or X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Climate control X Setting the air distribution Air-conditioning system Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents i You can also activate several of the air dis- tribution settings simultaneously. In order to do this, press several of the air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through different air vents. i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Setting the temperature Air-conditioning system You can set the temperature for the entire vehicle. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To increase or reduce: turn control : anticlockwise or clockwise (Y page 118). Change the temperature setting only in small increments. Start at 22 †. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To increase or decrease: turn control : or E anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 119). Change the temperature setting only in small increments. Start at 22 †. Setting the air distribution Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ buttons. The corresponding indicator lamp comes on. X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Air distribution settings ¯ Directs the airflow through the demister vents P Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents O Directs the airflow through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents b Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents as well as the demister vents a Directs the airflow through the footwell and demister vents _ Directs the airflow through the demister vents, the centre and side air vents as well as the footwell air vents Operating the climate control system airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Setting the air distribution Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. X Setting the airflow Air-conditioning system Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To increase or reduce: turn control A anticlockwise or clockwise (Y page 118). X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To increase or reduce:press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off This function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. Demisting the windscreen General notes You can use this function to defrost the windscreen or to demist the inside of the windscreen and the side windows. i You should only select the "Windscreen demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. Switching the "Windscreen demisting" function on or off Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i The "Windscreen demisting" function automatically sets the blower output to the optimum demisting effect. As a result, the airflow may increase or decrease automatically after the ¬ button is pressed. X i You can adjust the blower output manually while the "Windscreen demisting" function is in operation: RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow control A anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 118). RTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: press the ó or ô button. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previous settings are reactivated. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. Climate control i Regardless of the air distribution setting, 123 Operating the climate control system 124 or Climate control X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature control : anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 118). THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control: turn temperature control : or E anti-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 119). Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Air-conditioning system Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X Windows misted up on the outside Activate the windscreen wipers. Set the air distribution to P or O. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. X X Rear window heating General notes The rear window heating has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear. The rear window heating otherwise switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Problems with the rear window heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window heating The battery has not been sufficiently charged. has switched off prema- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, turely or cannot be interior lighting or the seat heating. switched on. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating can be switched on again. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode General notes You can deactivate the flow of fresh air temporarily if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you activate air-recirculation mode, the windows can mist up more quickly, particularly at low temperatures. Use air-recirculation mode only briefly to prevent the windows from misting up. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X To activate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the e button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. X i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated auto- matically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 7 † Rafter approximately five minutes if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 7 † if the cooling with air dehumidification function is activated Convenience opening or closing using the air-recirculation button G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. G WARNING During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the W switch in the door to stop the movement of the side windows. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the e button until the side windows start to close automatically. Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof closes simultaneously. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: X Press the W button to stop the side windows. The side windows stop. X To then open the side window, press the W button again. or X Press and hold the e button again for at least two seconds. The side windows move in the opposite direction. X Only vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: press the 3 switch to stop the panorama sliding sunroof. The panorama sliding sunroof stops. X To then open the panorama sliding sunroof, pull back on the 3 switch. i Observe the notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side windows (Y page 89) Rthe panorama sliding sunroof (Y page 93) X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the e button until the side windows start to open automatically. Vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof: the panorama sliding sunroof opens simultaneously. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the panorama sliding sunroof manually after closing Z 125 Climate control Operating the climate control system Operating the climate control system 126 with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Climate control Switching the residual heat on/off General notes The residual heat function is only available with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you switch on the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. Activating/deactivating Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 133). X Press the Ì button. The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights up or goes out. The indicator lamp in the button indicates that the respective function is activated. X i Residual heat is switched off automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on Auxiliary heating Important safety notes G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially car- bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extraction system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rthe Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. The auxiliary heating and the exhaust gas outlet are situated in front of the right-hand front wheel. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventilation draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. Operating the climate control system Before switching on Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Set the desired temperature. Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also be switched on if the manually set climate control is activated. Optimum comfort is attained by setting the system to automatic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation can be switched on/off using the button on the centre console or the remote control. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 211). X Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on or off using the button on the centre console General notes Climate control The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to the set temperature. This occurs without using the heat of the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this reason, the fuel tank must be at least Õ full to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. The auxiliary heating switches off when the engine is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation switches off when you turn the key to key position 2 (Y page 133). The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. 127 The colours of the indicator lamps on button : signify the following: RBlue: auxiliary ventilation activated RRed: auxiliary heating activated RYellow: departure time preselected (Y page 211) Activating/deactivating the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation X Press button :. The red or blue indicator lamp in button : lights up or goes out. Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation on or off using the remote control General notes Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Store the remote control for the auxiliary heating so that the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on unintentionally. In particular, ensure that the remote control for the auxiliary heating is kept out of the reach of children. The remote control has a range of approximately 300 metres. This range is reduced by: Rsources of radio interference Rsolid objects between the remote control and the vehicle Z Operating the climate control system 128 Climate control Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space If the remote control battery is low, the battery symbol on the left of the display is shown as empty. Replace the remote control battery and observe the important safety notes when doing so (Y page 129). Activating/deactivating the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation is activated. The number on the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is activated. The number on the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. A departure time has been activated. The departure time appears on the display. Remote control : Display ; u Switches the auxiliary heating or aux- iliary ventilation on Checks the status = . Sets the departure time ? ^ Switches the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation off A , Sets the departure time To switch on: press and hold the u button. ON is shown in the remote control display. X To switch off: press and hold the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Checking the status of the auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation X Briefly press the u button. The following messages may appear on the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating or auxiliary ventilation is deactivated. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary ventilation is currently activated. The number on the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes. A departure time has been activated. The auxiliary heating is currently activated. The number on the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. If the vehicle is not started after this time, the running time is increased by five minutes. If the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started, the auxiliary heating running time is increased. The auxiliary heating continues to run until the operating temperature is reached. If this is the case, the y symbol appears in the remote control display and the running time is zero minutes. Setting the departure time Make sure that the time set in the vehicle is correct before setting the departure time (see the separate operating instructions). Otherwise, the auxiliary heating may activate at the wrong Operating the climate control system Activating the set departure time Briefly press the u button. Press the , or . button repeatedly until the desired departure time appears in the display. X Press the u button. The Í symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C appear in the display. X X Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Climate control time and at an unsuitable location. When setting the departure time, observe the important safety notes (Y page 126). X Briefly press the u button. X Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears in the display. X Press the u and ^ buttons at the same time. The Î symbol in the remote control display flashes. X Press the , or . button to set the desired departure time. i The longer you press the , or . button, the faster the time changes. X Press the u and ^ buttons at the same time. The new departure time is stored. Replacing the battery Deactivating the set departure time Briefly press the u button. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown on the display. X Press the . button. The first departure time stored appears on the display. X Press the ^ button. OFF is shown in the remote control display. X Replacing the remote control battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. 129 A CR2450 lithium battery is required when replacing the battery. X Press a pointed object into recess :. X Slide battery cover ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. X Insert new battery = with the lettering facing upwards. X Slide battery cover ; in the opposite direction to the arrow on the remote control until it engages. Z 130 Air vents Climate control Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions FAIL¨ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating/ventilation on or off using the remote control. FAIL The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The starter battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the starter battery. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating/ventilation using the remote control. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using the remote control. The auxiliary heating/ventilation cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The auxiliary heating/ventilation is malfunctioning. X Have the auxiliary heating/ventilation checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior i Optimal climate control function is achieved by opening the air vents fully and setting the adjusters to the middle position. Air vents 131 Climate control Adjusting the air vents : Side window demister vent ; Side air vent To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; to the left. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go. X i The centre and rear air vents are adjusted in the same way. Z Driving and parking 132 Driving Running-in notes Driving Important safety notes Important safety notes In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1500 km The more you treat the engine with sufficient care at the start, the more satisfied you will be with the engine performance later on. RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine speeds for the first 1500 km. RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this period, e.g. driving at full throttle. RChange gear in good time, before the rev counter needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the rev counter. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. RVehicles with automatic transmission: try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). Additional notes on running in Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Rfor the first 1,500 km do not drive at speeds above 140 km/h. Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. You should also observe these notes on runningin if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose Driving is stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load operation and engine speeds greater than 5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This will help to protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation. Key positions Key g To remove the key 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the vehicle Vehicles with manual transmission: the steering is locked when the key is taken out of the ignition lock. i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, it can still be turned in the ignition lock. However, the ignition will not be switched on. The engine cannot be started. Start/Stop button General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with keys featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. A check that periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when the engine is started. When you insert the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds of recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. Pre-requisite for this is that: Ryou do not depress the brake pedal (vehicles with automatic transmission) Ryou do not depress the clutch pedal (vehicles with manual transmission) If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately (vehicles with automatic transmission). If you depress the clutch pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately (vehicles with manual transmission). To start the vehicle without actively using the key: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock Rthe key must be in the vehicle Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the key or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 77) Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another key Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. If you lock the vehicle with the key's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will no longer be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again Z Driving and parking ! Do not warm up the engine when the vehicle 133 134 Driving Driving and parking If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 84), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. You can switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for around three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/ stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with the Start/Stop button Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the key. You can only switch between Start/Stop button mode and key operation when the vehicle is stationary. You must also engage park position P (vehicles with automatic transmission). X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the key is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock When you switch on the ignition, all of the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. For further information on situations in which an indicator lamp either fails to go out after the engine is started or lights up while driving, please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster" (Y page 249). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windscreen wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is deactivated again. Starting the vehicle Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per- sons or road users out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rget Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING Starting procedure using the key Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. To start the engine using the key instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). The % preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Turn the key to position 3 (Y page 133) in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. General notes Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine runs at a higher engine speed during the cold start procedure so that the catalytic converter can reach operating temperature more quickly. The sound of the engine may change as a result. Manual transmission You can only start the engine when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to neutral N. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 144). The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 144). i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure using the Start/ Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the key in the ignition lock. The key must be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. This mode for starting the engine manually operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid key is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 133). Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine starts. Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is activated and the engine starts. Pulling away General notes G WARNING Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the engine speed is above the engine idling speed and you then engage transmission Z 135 Driving and parking Driving 136 Driving Driving and parking position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always keep the brake pedal firmly depressed and do not depress the accelerator pedal at the same time. Pulling away with a trailer ! Vehicles with manual transmission: change gear in good time and avoid spinning the wheels. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle automatically locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic door locking system (Y page 211). Vehicles with automatic transmission: it is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. Vehicles with automatic transmission: at transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 †, you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. i Vehicles with automatic transmission: upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Vehicles with automatic transmission: information on automatically releasing the electric parking brake (Y page 158). To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, apply the electric parking brake. X Press and hold handle :. The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains lit. X Depress the accelerator pedal. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release handle :. The electric parking brake is released The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Further information on the electric parking brake (Y page 157). Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a while, hill start assist no longer holds the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Driving ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. When pulling away again, the engine starts automatically. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes the engine off automatically if the vehicle stops moving. If the ECO start/stop function has been manually deactivated (Y page 138) or a malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the è or ç ECO symbol is not displayed. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. Automatic engine switch-off General notes The ECO start/stop function is operational and the è ECO symbol is displayed on the multifunction display if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system does not detect moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown. All the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is switched off automatically. The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (initial stop, then three subsequent stops) in succession. The ç ECO symbol is shown on the multifunction display after the engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the è ECO symbol is shown on the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is possible again. Vehicles with manual transmission : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the key or the Start/Stop button. If the è symbol is shown on the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop function switches Z Driving and parking Hill start assist is not active if: are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is in position N Rthe electric parking brake is applied RESP® is malfunctioning Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 148). Ryou 137 Driving and parking 138 Driving The ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically at low speeds. X Brake the vehicle. X Shift to neutral N (Y page 142), (follow gearshift instructions : to shift into neutral N, if necessary). X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off automatically. Vehicles with automatic transmission If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Vehicles with automatic transmission The engine is started automatically if you: Rrelease the brake pedal in transmission position D or N when the HOLD function is not active Rdepress the accelerator pedal Rmove the transmission out of position P Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. If you shift the transmission from R to D, the ECO start/stop function is available again as soon as the è symbol reappears on the multifunction display. Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on Automatic engine start General notes The engine is started automatically if: Ryou deactivate the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's charge status is too low Vehicles with manual transmission ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. The engine is started automatically if you: Rdepress the clutch pedal fully Rdepress the accelerator pedal X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the è or ç ECO symbol on the multifunction display go out. To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. If all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 137) are not fulfilled, the ç ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. If this is the case, the ECO start/ stop function is not available. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. X Driving You can choose between different AMG Performance exhaust system volumes using the position of the exhaust flap. If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected setting is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, the quietest setting is activated when the engine is next started. Setting the volume: X Press button :. If you select the loudest setting, indicator lamp ; lights up. Driving and parking AMG performance exhaust system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 139 Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 172) or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 171). X Try to start the engine again. The engine does not start. The starter motor is turning audibly. RThe engine electronics are malfunctioning. fuel supply is malfunctioning. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps on the instrument cluster go out. X Start the engine again (Y page 134). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. RThe Z 140 Driving Problem Driving and parking The engine does not start. The starter motor is turning audibly. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display shows 0. The engine does not start. The starter motor is not turning audibly. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The fuel tank is empty. Refuel the vehicle. X The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to excessively high thermal load. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a petrol The engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine engine: management system are/is malfunctioning. The engine is not running X Depress the accelerator pedal only slightly. smoothly and is misfirOtherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter ing. and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is not display is showing more being cooled sufficiently. than 120 †. The coolant X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to warning lamp may also cool down. be on and a warning tone X Check the coolant level (Y page 283). Observe the warning notes may sound. as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is not being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 141 Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: RThe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with adjustable damping or AMG RIDE CONTROL) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. Press DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are shown briefly on the display of the multimedia system. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the quality of the available fuel. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of what is shown on the multimedia system display. X Available drive programs: C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information on drive programs (Y page 148). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. Further information on manual gearshifting (Y page 150). DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive Rthe transmission management RESP® Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL) Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe availability of gliding mode If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, drive program C is activated when the engine is next started. Z Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Manual transmission 142 you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 in good time. This uses the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many times as necessary until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC SELECT controller : lights up in red. Available drive programs: Driving and parking X I Individual Individual settings C Comfort Comfort-orientated, engine and transmission settings optimised for economy S Sport Sporty engine and transmission settings S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty transmission settings RACE Maximum sportiness and engine and transmission settings suitable for the racetrack k Reverse gear 1 - 6 Forward gears Shifting to neutral N Additional information on drive programs (Y page 148). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. Further information on manual gearshifting (Y page 150). Manual transmission Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is X X Depress the clutch pedal fully. Shift the gear lever to position N :. depressed. ! When shifting to 5th and 6th gear, you must press the shift lever to the right. Otherwise, you could shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the engine or transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. ! On long and steep downhill gradients, espe- cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi- cle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. X Pull the gear lever up, push it to the left and then pull it back. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. For further information on the ECO start/stop function, see (Y page 137). Automatic transmission The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. The recommended gear is shown on the multifunction display. X Shift gear according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Drive programs Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine settings. Drive program I (Individual) Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. Rthe performance of the air-conditioning and heating systems is reduced. Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. In drive program I, the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with adjustable damping) Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control Information on configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Z Driving and parking Gearshift recommendation 143 144 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. Engaging park position P Driving and parking ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. For information on the selector lever in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 146). The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears on the transmission position readout on the multifunction display (Y page 144). j k i h Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear on the multifunction display. the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. When you have engaged park position P, make sure that the transmission position display shows P in the multifunction display. You can only engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary. Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in neutral N. At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 †, you can only shift out of park position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. In order to shift from park position P directly into R or D: Rdepress the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance Rpush Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou : Transmission position ; Gear = Drive program display The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display on the multifunction display is not working, you should pull switch off the engine using the key and remove the key Ryou switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 173) and on Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 170). Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 137). X Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rclimb Rreleasing the parking brake the automatic transmission out of park position P Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of children. Rshifting from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Engage neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key X Z 145 Driving and parking Automatic transmission 146 Automatic transmission Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Engaging park position P Driving and parking Overview of transmission positions X j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear on the multifunction display. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display If the transmission position display on the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program C or S. When the vehicle is stationary, press button :. Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Push the selector lever forwards past the first point of resistance. B C Park position This safeguards the vehicle against rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In order to secure the vehicle, always apply the electric parking brake in addition to the parking lock. In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the key and remove the key Ryou switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or frontpassenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary. A 147 Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. Driving and parking Transmission positions Automatic transmission ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to damage to the transmission. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. Gearshifting is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your driving style influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Z 148 Automatic transmission Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients Driving and parking G WARNING If the clutch overheats, the electronic management system is automatically deactivated. This interrupts the power transmission. The vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk of an accident. Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator. For further information on kickdown in manual drive program M (Y page 152). Towing a trailer Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 196). X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, select a lower gear (Y page 160), even if cruise control, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the speed limiter are activated. The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a warning tone sounds. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): the Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running display message appears in the multifunction display. You will only be able to continue your journey once the clutch has cooled down and the display message in the multifunction display has disappeared. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care display message appears in the multifunction display. Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by: Rdepressing the brake pedal Ractivating the HOLD function Rapplying the electric parking brake Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Kickdown Drive program S (Sport) Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in the automatic drive programs and in temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is selected permanently, kickdown is not possible. Drive programs All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rsporty engine settings. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. Fuel consumption may be higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I, the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension (vehicles with adjustable damping or AMG RIDE CONTROL) Rthe steering Automatic transmission climate control Information on configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. i To permanently shift the gears manually in drive program I using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, select the M (Manual) setting for the drive. Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterised by the following: Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is activated automatically when engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and the accelerator is not depressed. At the same time the transmission’s clutch opens and the vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As a result great distances can be completed without the engine brake and fuel consumption reduced. i The availability of gliding mode depends on various factors, including the following: Rthe engine and transmission temperature Rthe downhill gradient Rthe vehicle speed Rperforming regular adaptation functions When you depress the brake pedal, gliding mode is deactivated, depending on pedal pressure. When you activate cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, gliding mode is not available. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I, the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine management) Rthe transmission management Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL) RESP® Information on configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is available. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. Fuel consumption may be higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR RIDE CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Z Driving and parking Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe 149 150 Automatic transmission Driving and parking Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. Rfuel consumption may be higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR RIDE CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL) Drive program RACE is characterised by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack. Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum sportiness. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. Rfuel consumption may be higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly rigid springing and damping settings. Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Manual gearshifting General notes You can shift gears yourself using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission must be in position D to do this. Depending on which steering wheel gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear up or down, if permitted. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. Temporary setting To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. X Pull steering wheel gearshift paddle : or ;. X The temporary setting will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions, the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ; and hold it in place. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the transmission position. or X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the drive program. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change the drive program. Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) To activate: shift the selector lever to position D. X Press button :. X X or X To deactivate: press button :. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed in the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic downshifting occurs when coasting. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Gearshift recommendation If position D (automatic transmission) is selected for the transmission in drive program I: shift to drive program I with the DYNAMIC SELECT controller. Shifting gears ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. The recommended gear is shown on the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display. Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! The automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Z 151 Driving and parking Automatic transmission Refuelling Driving and parking 152 Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown on the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear : when message ; is shown in the multifunction display. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to use kickdown in temporary manual drive program M. When manual drive program M is selected permanently, kickdown is not possible. Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. X Problems with the transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. X Stop. The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position P. ger shifts into all of the X Switch off the engine. gears. Reverse gear can no lon- X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D. ger be engaged. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Refuelling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Refuelling RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can. Do not get back into the vehicle during the refuelling process; Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 327). Refuelling General notes Observe the important safety notes (Y page 152). The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automatically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the key. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Z Driving and parking Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: 153 Driving and parking 154 Refuelling Opening the fuel filler flap Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings open. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. To open the fuel filler flap Tyre pressure table To insert the fuel filler cap Instruction label on the fuel type to be refuelled X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO: X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. : ; = ? X Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. X Parking 155 Problems with the fuel and fuel tank Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. The engine does not start. The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 133). X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for a maximum of ten seconds (Y page 133). X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76). The key battery is weak or discharged. Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 78). X The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. Z Driving and parking G WARNING There is a risk of fire or explosion. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS‑GO: X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 156 Parking G WARNING Manual transmission If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Shift to either 1st gear or reverse gear R. With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 133). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps on the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". X Apply the electric parking brake. Rrelease the parking brake Driving and parking Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is safeguarded against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied Ron vehicles with manual transmission, engage 1st gear or reverse gear Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission must be in position P and the transmission position display must show P in the multifunction display. Rthe key must be removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the kerb. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. X X Automatic transmission X Apply the electric parking brake. X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): shift the transmission to position P. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :. With the key: turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 133). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps on the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to key position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the key: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the key from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in the ignition lock. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, park the vehicle only on level ground and secure it to prevent it from rolling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake carries out a function check at regular intervals when the engine is switched off. Noises that occur are normal. Applying or releasing manually Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. X To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the key is removed. X To release: pull handle :. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can be released only: Rwhen the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button Z 157 Driving and parking Parking 158 Parking Driving and parking Applying automatically (vehicles with automatic transmission) The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened To prevent the electric parking brake from being applied automatically, pull handle :. The electric parking brake is also applied automatically if: RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp on the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Applying automatically (vehicles with manual transmission) The electric parking brake is applied automatically when the vehicle is being kept stationary by the HOLD function. In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is open Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Releasing automatically The electric parking brake can only be released automatically in vehicles with automatic transmission. The electric parking brake of your vehicle is released automatically when all the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe engine is running Rthe transmission is in position D or R Rthe seat belt is fastened Ryou depress the accelerator pedal If the transmission is in position R, the boot lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled for the electric parking brake to be released automatically: Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, press handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 157). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Release parking brake message appears Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Driving tips If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Consumption can be significantly influenced by your driving style. i You can obtain information on trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus from start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve fuel level message is shown in the multifunction display instead of range ?. In addition, the 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up (Y page 255). Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: RThe tyres should always be inflated to the recommended tyre pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RRemove roof racks when they are not needed. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. RHave all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Service Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you Z Driving and parking Parking up the vehicle 159 160 Driving tips Driving and parking The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of the acceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: sporty acceleration ; Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is grey: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus from start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: Rload Rtyre pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Rthe use of electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style involves driving at a moderate engine speed. To achieve a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendation. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E (vehicles with DYNAMIC SELECT button). On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the motorway, only the outer area for "Constant" will change. The ECO display summarises the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. During a prolonged driving time, these changes are smaller. For more marked changes, perform a manual reset (Y page 204). Further information on the ECO display (Y page 204). Brakes Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to activate manual gearshifting beforehand (Y page 150). Driving tips Heavy and light loads G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking distance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed, paying attention to traffic conditions. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet road surfaces If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after a car wash or after driving through deep water. You will have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This can increase the braking distance considerably. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. RMaintain a much greater distance to the vehicle in front. New brake pads/linings Brake pads/linings and discs that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou are driving at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth Z Driving and parking Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. This also applies if you have activated cruise control, the speed limiter or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated (vehicles with automatic transmission): the automatic transmission may switch back to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. 161 162 Driving systems Driving and parking For this reason, drive in the following manner in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which aquaplaning can occur: Rlower your speed Ravoid tyre ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise damage the engine, the electronics or the transmission. If you must drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rin the case of standing water, the water level must be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. Do not use cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by using corrective steering. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Further information on driving with snow chains (Y page 313). Further information on driving with summer tyres (Y page 312). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 312). Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. On vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected the manual drive program M (Y page 150). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the Driving systems Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads. Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever = To activate at the current speed/last stored speed ? To activate or reduce speed A To switch between cruise control and the variable speed limiter B To deactivate cruise control You can operate cruise control and the variable speed limiter with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected RLIM indicator lamp on: variable limiter is selected. When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. Selecting cruise control To select cruise control:check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on or off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. X Activation conditions To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe electric parking brake must be released. Ryou are driving faster than 30 km/h. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever must be in position D. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, a gear must be engaged. Rcruise control must be selected. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Storing and maintaining the current speed : To activate or increase speed ; LIM indicator lamp You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. Z Driving and parking engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. When the engine is running, you can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed between 30 km/h and the technically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle. If the set value of the permanent limiter is lower, then this value applies (Y page 166). Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions are appropriate for maintaining a steady speed for a prolonged period. The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. 163 Driving systems 164 Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically braking the vehicle. X Driving and parking X i Vehicles with manual transmission: RAlways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. RChange gear in good time. RIf possible, do not change down several gears at a time. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Setting a speed Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X To adjust the set speed in10 km/hincrements:briefly press cruise control lever : up or beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in1 km/hincrements:briefly press cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® engages or you deactivate ESP® Rwhile driving a vehicle with manual transmission, you shift into neutral or depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you shift to a gear that is too high, and as a result the engine speed is too low Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, you shift to position N while driving Rthe Driving systems If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐ trol off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. 165 Variable speed limiter General notes i The last speed stored is cleared when you Speed limiter General notes The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. The limiter brakes automatically in order to adjust the vehicle's speed to the stored speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. On vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected the manual drive program M (Y page 150). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: RVariable for maximum permissible speeds, e.g. in built-up areas RPermanent for a technically permitted maximum vehicle speed, e.g. when driving with winter tyres fitted (Y page 166) i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the stored maximum permissible speed. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, the speed limiter can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. The limiter cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. The limiter is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver of the speed stored. : Activates or increases speed ; LIM indicator lamp = Activates at the current speed/last stored speed ? Activates or reduces speed A Switches between cruise control and the variable speed limiter B Switches off the speed limiter With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable speed limiter. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. RLIM indicator lamp on: variable speed limiter is selected. When the engine is running, you can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed between 30 km/h and the maximum design speed of the vehicle. If the set value of the permanent limiter is lower then this value applies (Y page 166). Selecting the variable speed limiter X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on. If it is on, the variable speed limiter is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. The variable limiter is selected. Z Driving and parking switch off the engine. Driving systems 166 Driving and parking Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ?. The current speed is stored and shown in the multifunction display. Storing or calling up the speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you =. Setting a speed X or To adjust the set speed in10 km/hincrements:briefly press the cruise control lever up : beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ? for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in1 km/hincrements:briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the pressure point until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Switching the speed limiter to passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode. The Limiter pas‐ sive message appears in the multifunction display. You can then exceed the stored speed. The limiter is activated again if, without kickdown, you: Rdrive more slowly than the stored speed Rset a new speed or Rcall up the last speed stored again The Limiter passive message in the multifunction display disappears. Switching off the variable speed limiter You cannot switch the variable speed limiter off by braking. There are several ways to deactivate the variable speed limiter: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards B. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow A. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever goes out. The variable speed limiter is switched off. Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. Vehicles with manual transmission: the limiter switches off if you shift to a higher gear and as a result, the engine speed is too low. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Permanent limiter If you wish to restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle for an extended period (e.g. when driving with winter tyres), the desired maximum speed can be set with the permanent limiter. You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed to a value between 160 km/h and 240 km/h (Y page 211). Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. When you confirm the message with a or %, the display is suppressed until you next switch off the engine. The speed will only be displayed again once the engine has been restarted. The permanent limiter remains active even if the variable limiter is deactivated. The driven speed will remain below the stored speed even in the event of kickdown. Driving systems General notes Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. The system detects vehicles using the radar sensor system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to maintain the designated distance from the vehicle in front. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Without your intervention, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a collision. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately to increase the distance to the vehicle in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. Shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC on roads with steep gradients. For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational. Important safety notes G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not recognise Rpeople or animals Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles vehicles or crossing traffic As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC warns you. G WARNING Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a risk of an accident. Apply the brakes yourself in these situations and try to take evasive action. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Z Driving and parking Distance Pilot DISTRONIC 167 Driving and parking 168 Driving systems Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads. Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the following situations: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rstrong radar reflections, e.g. in multi-storey car parks If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may unexpectedly accelerate to the speed stored. This speed can: Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road Rbe so high on the right lane that you pass vehicles driving in the left lane Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving in the right lane If a new driver takes over, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever To store the current speed or a higher speed To set the specified minimum distance LIM indicator lamp To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed A To store the current speed or a lower speed : ; = ? B To switch between Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable limiter C To deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC With the cruise control lever, you can operate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the variable limiter. LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp= =off: distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. RLIM indicator lamp= =on: variable limiter is selected. Selecting Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off. If it is off, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is already selected. X If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow B. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control lever goes out. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is selected. X Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Activation conditions ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the following conditions must be fulfilled: RThe engine must be running. It may take up to two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is ready for use. RThe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be switched on, but not intervening. RParking Pilot must not be activated. RThe transmission must be in position D. RThe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Driving systems RThe front-passenger door must be closed. vehicle must not be skidding. Switching on Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down A. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or down A until the desired speed is set. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the Distance Pilot passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. The position of the accelerator pedal will determine the speed. You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h. X Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up a stored speed and this is different from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or brakes. If you do not know what the stored speed is, the vehicle may accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Take the traffic conditions into account before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know what the stored speed is, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Pulling away and driving If you want to pull away with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated: accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all times. If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise control. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slowermoving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a fastermoving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. X i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated when you depress the brake, except when the vehicle is stationary. Selecting the drive program Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty driving style when you select the S+ drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles only), S (Y page 148) or the manual drive program (Y page 150). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the E (C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles:) drive program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-start traffic. Changing lanes If you want to change to the overtaking lane on multi-lane roads, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports you if: Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/h RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Z Driving and parking RThe 169 170 Driving systems RYou switch on the respective turn signal Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently detect a danger of collision If these conditions are met, your vehicle accelerates. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the new speed stored. X To adjust the set speed in1 km/hincrements: briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down A to the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 1 km/h increments. X To adjust the set speed in10 km/hincrements: press the cruise control lever briefly up : or down A beyond the pressure point. The last stored speed increases or decreases in 10 km/h increments. i After a short period, the vehicle is secured i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated Driving and parking RDistance Stopping by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function The electric parking brake is applied automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is active when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient If a fault occurs, the transmission may also shift to position P automatically. Setting a speed Bear in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the set speed. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached or press the cruise if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Setting the specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehicle in front, dependent on the vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 171). The specified minimum distance can be changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is switched on or off. i Make sure that you maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Driving systems Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC RYou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open RThe vehicle is skidding RYou activate Parking Pilot If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated automatically, you will hear a warning tone. The Distance Pilot off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if you activate DSR. The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer There are several ways to deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow =. The variable limiter is selected. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever lights up. When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the Distance Pilot off message appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if: RYou apply the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® engages or you deactivate ESP® RThe transmission is in the P, R or N position When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated and there are no vehicles detected in front, one or two segments ; in the speed range set light up. If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front = and stored speed : light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated In the Assistance menu (Y page 208) of the onboard computer, you can select the assistance graphic display. Z Driving and parking To increase: turn control = in direction ;. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = in direction :. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X 171 Driving systems 172 Tips for driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC Driving and parking General notes Assistance graphic : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator: current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 208). Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated You will initially see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Assistance graphic : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable = Own vehicle ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated X Select the Assistance graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 208). Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles driving in a different lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. ROther vehicles changing lane: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is revealed, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for them. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC under the following conditions, the vehicle could pull away unintentionally: - at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example - if there is a vehicle in front after a crossing with the HOLD function activated In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is then switched off. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic Driving systems The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. 173 Activating the HOLD function G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle from rolling away. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 173). Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. i After a short period, the vehicle is secured by the electric parking brake, thus relieving the service brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Z Driving and parking Important safety notes 174 Driving systems The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient Driving and parking Vehicles with manual transmission The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Ra system fault occurs Rthe power supply is insufficient The Brake immediately message may also appear on the multifunction display. X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message on the multifunction display goes out. The HOLD function is deactivated. A horn will sound at regular intervals if you turn off the engine, take off your seat belt or open the driver's door when the HOLD function is activated. The horn alerts you to the fact that the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. i Once you have switched off the engine, you cannot restart it until you have deactivated the HOLD function. Start-off assist (except MercedesAMG vehicles) Important safety notes G WARNING If you use start-off assist, individual wheels may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the area around the vehicle. Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required; the tyres and vehicle must also be in good condition. Do not activate start-off assist on public roads. Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 66). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 69). Activating start-off assist Deactivate ESP® (Y page 209). Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. X Depress the brake pedal hard with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D. X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select the S drive program (Y page 141). X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Cancelling start-off assist X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. X Reactivate ESP®. X X RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i RACE START must not be used on normal roads. RACE START must be activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads. i RACE START is only available in Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. G WARNING If you use RACE START, individual tyres may get into a spin and the vehicle could skid. Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there Driving systems RACE START enables optimum acceleration from a standing start. For this, a suitably highgrip road surface is required; the tyres and vehicle must also be in good condition. i Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 66). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 69). Activation conditions You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors, the bonnet and the boot lid are closed Rthe engine is running and the transmission, traction control and engine are at operating temperature Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) Rthe transmission is in position D Rone of the drive programs S, S+ or RACE is selected (Y page 141) Activating RACE START Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel gearshift paddles. X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel gearshift paddles. i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Man‐ ual message appears in the multifunction display. X X or To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 150). To confirm: pull the right steering wheel shift paddle (Y page 150). The RACE START available Depress accelerator message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed increases. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START is cancelled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START cancelled message. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START not pos‐ sible or RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. X i After using it several times in short succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven. AMG RIDE CONTROL General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. Z Driving and parking is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. 175 Driving and parking 176 Driving systems The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of "Sport" or "Comfort" The suspension setting is adjusted using the corresponding button on the centre console. X i The mode can also be set using the AMG ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 141). If the ignition is switched off for less than four hours, the previously selected drive program is activated when the engine is next started. If the ignition is switched off for more than four hours, Comfort mode is activated when the engine is next started. Sport mode The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving at speed on straight roads, e.g. motorways. Press button : again to switch off indicator lamp ;. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC This may damage the differential. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. 4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. Raccelerate less when driving. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. Chassis with adaptive adjustable damping General notes Suspension with the Adaptive Damping System provides improved driving comfort and continuously controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping characteristics adapt to the current operating and driving situation. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface conditions Rthe drive program selected The drive program can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 141). Selecting Comfort mode In the Comfort drive program, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this drive program if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. Also select the Comfort drive program when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of motorway. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 141) as many times as necessary until the Comfort drive program is selected. Selecting Sport mode The firmer suspension setting in the Sport drive program ensures even better contact with the road. Select this drive program when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button (Y page 141) as many times as necessary until the Sport drive program is selected. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Important safety notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and an obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a lorry or a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist PARKTRONIC to malfunction. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N on vehicles with automatic transmission Rrelease the electric parking brake Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish the electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Range of the sensors General notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as Z 177 Driving and parking Driving systems 178 Driving systems Driving and parking Minimum distance Centre Approx. 20 cm Corners Approx. 20 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Warning displays (example) The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 289). Range : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness : Front sensors detection range ; Rear sensors detection range Front sensors Centre Approx. 100 cm Corners Approx. 60 cm Rear sensors Centre Approx. 120 cm Corners Approx. 80 cm The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. If yellow segments = showing operational readiness light up, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational. The gear lever position or the transmission position of the automatic transmission and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Driving systems Manual transmission: Gear lever position Warning display Forward gear or Neutral Front area activated This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Reverse gear or the Rear and front areas activated vehicle is rolling backwards Automatic transmission: Transmission posi- Warning display tion D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas activated rolling backwards P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. 179 : Indicator lamp ; Deactivates/activates Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : lights up, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati- cally activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Z 180 Driving systems Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning and has been deactithe Parking Assist vated. PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop. hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or malfunctioning. the Parking Assist X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 289). PARKTRONIC warning X Switch the ignition back on. displays are lit. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrathen deactivated. sound waves. X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Parking Pilot General notes Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also available (Y page 177). i The active braking application is only avail- able on vehicles with automatic transmission. Important safety notes Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the manoeuvring range. When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with other road users. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rin a zone where parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Driving systems Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the detection range of Parking Pilot will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RParking Pilot may steer in too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects This could cause a collision. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot. Rthe Further information on the detection range (Y page 177). Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb Ryou forward-park Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a kerb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, such as by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to manoeuvre into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Pilot is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Z Driving and parking Parking tips: Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possible past the parking space Rparking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly Rparking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately Rpay attention to the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning messages (Y page 178) during the parking procedure Ryou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Parking Pilot will then be cancelled Rwhen transporting a load that protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Parking Pilot Rnever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are fitted Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Ron straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement For vehicles with the trailer tow hitch folded out, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly longer. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Parking Pilot. Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking Pilot is no longer available. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. 181 Driving and parking 182 Driving systems Parking Pilot will detect only parking spaces which are: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and are at least 1.5 m wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 1.0 m wider than your vehicle i Note that Parking Pilot cannot measure the length of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit in the parking space. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Parking Pilot displays only parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 15 m away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i Vehicles with automatic transmission: If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is parking. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position R. Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Pilot active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Release the multifunction steering wheel. Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, drive at a speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise Parking Pilot is cancelled. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Parking Pilot active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Parking Pilot active Engage forward gear Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission: select transmission position D while the vehicle is stationary. Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to first gear while the vehicle is stationary. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction. The Parking Pilot active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the front border of the parking space. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Parking Pilot active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with manual transmission: the Parking Pilot active Engage reverse gearObserve surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Parking Pilot ended message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Parking Pilot is ended, you must steer and brake again yourself. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front of and X behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should abort the parking procedure with Parking Pilot. RYou can also preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be cancelled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Parking Pilot can support you when exiting the parking space: Ryou need to have parked using Parking Pilot Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A kerb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is manoeuvred into the parking space. Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m must be available. Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using the Parking Pilot i Vehicles with automatic transmission: If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you will drive out of the parking space. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position D or R. Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to forward or reverse gear. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. Z 183 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 184 X or To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. To exit a parking space using Parking Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Pilot active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Release the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 10 km/h when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is cancelled. X Vehicles with manual transmission: stop, when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Vehicles with manual transmission: depending on the message or as required, engage forward or reverse gear. Parking Pilot steers immediately in the other direction. The Parking Pilot active Accelerate and brake Observe sur‐ roundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you reverse after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Parking Pilot ended message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example, when you recognise that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Cancelling Parking Pilot X Driving and parking X or Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Parking Pilot is cancelled at once. The Park‐ ing Pilot cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 179). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off and Parking Pilot is immediately cancelled. The Parking Pilot cancelled message appears in the multifunction display. Parking Pilot is cancelled automatically when: Rthe electric parking brake is applied Rtransmission position P is selected in vehicles with automatic transmission Rparking with Parking Pilot is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails. In such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Parking Pilot cancelled message. When Parking Pilot is cancelled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator pedal again. X Reversing camera General notes Reversing camera : is an optical parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your Driving systems vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror. 185 Activating/deactivating the reversing camera display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of reversing camera messages in the multimedia system display. See the notes on cleaning (Y page 289). Important safety notes The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in range while manoeuvring and parking. The reversing camera will not function or will function only in a limited manner: RIf the boot lid is open RIn heavy rain, snow or fog RAt night or in very dark places RIf the camera is exposed to very bright light RIf the area is lit by fluorescent lamps or LED lighting (the display may flicker) RIf there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter RIf the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 289) RIf the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). To activate: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Owner's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the multimedia system display. The image from the reversing camera is available throughout the manoeuvring process. X To switch the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch:using the controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer". The symbol of the selected function is highlighted. To deactivate: the reversing camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. X Messages in the multimedia system display The reversing camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the reversing camera in the following locations: RVery close to the rear bumper RUnder the rear bumper RIn the area immediately above the recessed handle on the boot lid ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Z Driving and parking i The text shown in the multimedia system 186 Driving systems Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. Driving and parking Rthe : Front warning displays ; Additional measurement operational readi- ness indicator of the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC = Rear warning displays : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 178), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system display. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display. "Reverse parking" function Reversing straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle Driving systems Make sure that the reversing camera is activated (Y page 185). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully reverse until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. 187 Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the reversing camera is activated (Y page 185). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and reverse carefully. : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the centre position while the vehicle is stationary. Z Driving and parking X Driving systems Driving and parking 188 : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Reverse carefully until you have reached the end position. Red guide line : is then at the end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. "Coupling up a trailer" function : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.30 m from the ball coupling ; Trailer drawbar locating aid = Trailer drawbar ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func- tion A Ball coupling Select symbol ? using the controller. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling. X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar locating aid ; points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar =. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar = reaches the red guide line. The distance between the trailer drawbar and the red guide line is now approximately 0.30 m. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 196). X Wide-angle function : Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle ; Trailer drawbar This function is available only on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling. X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ;. : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis- plays Driving systems Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. 189 Displaying the attention level ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys such as on motorways and trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may not always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late, or may not detect them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations: Rthe length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or contains potholes Rin case of strong side winds Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts assessing your tiredness again when you continue your journey if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break You can have current status information displayed in the Assistance menu (Y page 208) of the on-board computer. X Select the assistance graphic display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 208). The following information is displayed: Rthe length of the journey since the last break Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST(Attention Attention level), level displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 60 km/h or above 200 km/h. Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 209). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been switched off. The sensitivity selected Z Driving and parking General notes 190 Driving systems corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Driving and parking Warning on the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a break! In addition to the message shown on the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks that allow for adequate recuperation. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will happen only if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with multimedia system COMAND Online: if a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and you will then be navigated to this service station. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system; see Digital Owner's Manual. Traffic Sign Assist General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted and overtaking restrictions to the driver in the instrument cluster. Driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction triggers a warning. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with multifunction camera : attached at the top of the windscreen. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are also used to determine the current speed limit. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits and overtaking restrictions is updated. The display can also be updated without a visible traffic sign in the following situations: RThe vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorway exit or slip road) RA village or town boundary that is stored in the digital map is passed RThe last traffic sign detected by the camera has not been repeated If a sign indicating the end of a restriction (speed limit or overtaking restriction) is passed, the sign is displayed for five seconds. The currently applicable traffic regulation continues to be shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 208). The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions). The traffic signs are only displayed with the restriction if: RThe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, display : is shown in the multifunction display. Driving systems 191 Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits and overtaking restrictions. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable in the following situations: RVisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray RGlare, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky RDirt, ice or misting on the windscreen in the vicinity of the camera RTraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice, snow) RThe traffic signs are insufficiently lit at night RSigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes) RThe information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date : Maximum permissible speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h (80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. No entry (wrong-way warning) Activating Traffic Sign Assist If you have activated the Traffic Sign Assist display in the on-board computer, the traffic regulations (speed limits and overtaking restrictions) are displayed in the instrument cluster for five seconds in each case. The wrong-way warning and the traffic sign display for speed limits and overtaking restrictions remain active in the assistance graphic even when the display has been deactivated. X Activate the Traffic Sign Assist display using the on-board computer (Y page 208). Instrument cluster display Speed limit with unknown restriction i The following illustrations are examples of vehicles with colour multifunction display. The illustrations of vehicles with black and white multifunction display differ from them. i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account on observance of the maximum permissible speed. A warning message : is displayed in the instrument cluster if Traffic Sign Assist detects that you are passing a “no entry” sign and you are driving in the wrong direction. You will then also hear a warning tone. You should immediately check your direction of travel in order to avoid danger to yourself and other road users. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 192) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 193). Z Driving and parking Important safety notes 192 Driving systems Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 30 km/h. Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: Rovertaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rwhen the difference in the speed of approach and overtaking is too great As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in these situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired in the following situations: Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a motorcycle or a bicycle Rvery wide lanes Rnarrow lanes Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their lane Rbarriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Blind Spot Assist monitors an area up to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid boundaries Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are driving alongside particularly long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time Warning display Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, e.g. by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly in such cases. : Warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow Driving systems To do so, you will need to deactivate Blind Spot Assist if: Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock Rthe engine is not running Rthe electrical connection to the trailer has been established Lane Keeping Assist Driving and parking up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 12 km/h. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. General notes Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the blind spot monitoring range and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Activating Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 209). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X Towing a trailer If you couple up a trailer, make sure that you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors light up yellow and the Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors. 193 Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : attached at the top of the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in a speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration through the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Rnot Z Towing a trailer 194 Driving and parking G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: RPoor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray RGlare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) RThe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera RNo or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. in a construction area RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow RThe distance to the vehicle in front is so small that the lane markings cannot be detected RThe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge RThe road is narrow and winding RThere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway Activating Lane Keeping Assist X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the onboard computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 209). If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and lane markings are detected, the lane markings in the assistance graphics display (Y page 208) are shown in green. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: RYou have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. RA driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or ESP® engages. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: RYou have switched on the turn signal. In this case, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time RA driving safety system such as ABS, BAS or ESP® engages RYou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown RYou brake hard RYou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly RYou cut the corner on a sharp bend To ensure that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system detects certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier in the following situations: RYou approach the outer lane marking on a bend RThe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motorway RThe system detects solid lane markings The warning vibration occurs later in the following situations: RThe road has narrow lanes RYou cut the corner on a bend Towing a trailer Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer combination if it begins to swerve. The vehicle/trailer combination could even overturn. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten out the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing speed. Decrease your speed and do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. Towing a trailer If the maximum permissible load for a carrier system is exceeded, the carrier could come loose from the vehicle and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never exceed the maximum permissible load when using a carrier. ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis. Retrofitting a trailer tow hitch is only permissible if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, then the vehicle is not approved for towing a trailer. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Exceeding the maximum permissible noseweight of the trailer drawbar on the ball coupling may cause damage to the following: Ryour vehicle Rtrailer Rball coupling Rtrailer tow hitch The vehicle/trailer combination could become unstable. The vehicle/trailer combination could also become unstable if the noseweight used is lower than the minimum permissible noseweight. To avoid hazardous situations: Rmake sure to check the noseweight before each journey Rthe noseweight should be as close as possible to the maximum noseweight Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible noseweight Rthe noseweight must not be lower than the minimum permissible noseweight Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found: Rin your vehicle documents Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch and the trailer Ron the vehicle identification plate If the values differ, the lowest value applies. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the identification plates and for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 334). G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. When reversing the towing vehicle, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradientclimbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle This can impair the vehicle's handling characteristics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do Z Driving and parking G WARNING 195 196 Towing a trailer not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination. Notes on towing a trailer Driving and parking General notes Trailer towing is not possible on the following models: RCLA 180 d BlueEFFICIENCY Edition RCLA 250 Sport RCLA 250 Sport 4MATIC RMercedes‑AMG CLA 45 4MATIC When towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for the maximum load. Further information on the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 313). Please note that when towing a trailer, the following driving systems have limited availability or are not available at all. RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 177) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 192) The height of the ball coupling changes with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. You will find fitting dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (Y page 334). Driving tips Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisation (Y page 72). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/ trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different to when driving without a trailer and the vehicle will consume more fuel. Shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. For vehicles with automatic transmission, you need to have selected manual drive program M (Y page 150). This also applies if you have activated cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on downhill gradients while the manual drive program M is temporarily activated (vehicles with automatic transmission): the automatic transmission may switch back to the last active automatic drive program E or S. The automatic transmission may shift to a higher gear. This can reduce the engine's braking effect. Driving tips RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability from a standstill, decrease with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: X Do not accelerate under any circumstances X Do not countersteer X Brake, if necessary Towing a trailer 197 Folding out the ball coupling G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an accident. Always engage the ball coupling as described. G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. X X Pull out release wheel =. Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far as it will go. The ball coupling disengages and folds out behind the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fold out the ball coupling. The release wheel is located behind the lefthand side trim panel in the luggage compartment. Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow until it engages in a vertical position. The indicator lamp on the release wheel goes out. The power socket folds down automatically. The multifunction display shows the Check trailer hitch lock display message until the ball coupling is engaged. X Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling and store it in a safe place. X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling is clean and that it is either greased or dry (grease free), depending on the instructions for the trailer. X X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise, the fold down and remove cover ;. Folding in the ball coupling G WARNING If you release the ball coupling or it does not engage correctly when folding in, it will swing out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, Z Driving and parking Folding out the ball coupling Towing a trailer 198 there is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting range is unobstructed. Always make sure that the ball coupling engages when folding in. Driving and parking i Fold the ball coupling in if you are not using the trailer tow hitch. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and the trailer cables are disconnected. X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. X i The release wheel is located behind the left- hand side trim panel in the luggage compartment. X To open the cover: turn handle : anticlockwise, then fold down and remove cover ;. X X X Pull out release wheel =. Turn release wheel = anti-clockwise as far as it will go. The ball coupling disengages and folds out behind the rear bumper. Indicator lamp ? flashes. Press the ball coupling until it engages audibly behind the bumper. The indicator lamp on the release knob and the message in the multifunction display go out. Coupling up a trailer Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Position the trailer horizontally behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electric connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X Check that the trailer lighting system is working. A connected trailer is only recognised when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is working properly. The function of other systems, such as ESP® or PARKTRONIC also depends on this. X Uncoupling a trailer G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. X Make sure that the transmission is in position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the trailer against rolling away. X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the trailer. Trailer power supply ! You can connect accessories to the perma- nent power supply up to a maximum of 240 W. You cannot charge a trailer battery using the power supply. When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. You can find more information about fitting the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist workshop. X To switch the connected power supply on or off: turn the key to position 2or 0 respectively (Y page 133). Towing a trailer 199 Failure check for LEDs Driving and parking If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, a malfunction message may appear in the multifunction display even if there is no fault. The reason for the error message may be that the current has fallen below the minimum of 50 mA. To ensure reliable operation of the failure indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting must be guaranteed a minimum current of 50 mA. Trailer with 7-pin connector General notes Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can connect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Fitting the adapter ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. ! Remove the installed adapter cable before folding in the ball coupling. Otherwise, damage may occur to the rear bumper and the adapter cable. Open the socket cover. Insert the plug connector with lug : into groove = on the socket. X Turn bayonet connection ; clockwise to the stop. X Let the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X Z 200 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognise function restrictions relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 32). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 32). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or anti-clockwise. If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or L position, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments on vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RVariable speed limiter is activated (Y page 165): The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected speed limitation. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated (Y page 167): One or two segments in the stored speed range light up. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Rev counter ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The engine is limited within a range to protect the engine when the red band is reached. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the measured air temperature and not the road surface temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 202). Displays and operation Operating the on-board computer Overview On-board computer and displays There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature appears in the multifunction display. Coolant temperature gauge G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32). Under normal operating conditions and with the correct coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. At high outside temperatures and when driving in mountainous terrain, the coolant temperature may rise to the end of the scale. 201 : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar RScrolls through lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects Z 202 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 9 : Press and hold: the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open ~ RRejects 6 RMakes RIn a RConfirms % Press briefly: or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches Multifunction display the selection or display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialling the selected number RBack RVehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control of the navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND Online: switches off LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions) RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ó with Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND Online: Switches off LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions) 8 RMute W X RAdjusts RVehicles the volume : Permanent display: outside temperature or ; = ? A B speed (Y page 210) Time Text field Menu bar Drive program (Y page 144) Transmission position (Y page 146) Vehicles with manual transmission: the indicators in the lower part of the multifunction display differ from those shown here. For Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the lower and upper part of the multifunction display differ from those shown here. X To display menu bar?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. i Set the time using the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. Menus and submenus RZ Gearshift recommendation for manual transmission (Y page 143) or for automatic transmission (shifting manually) (Y page 150) Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 180) R¯ Cruise control (Y page 162) RÈ Limiter (Y page 165) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 109) Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 137) Rë HOLD function (Y page 172) R120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed exceeded (only for certain countries) Menus and submenus Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip meter : and total distance recorder ; appears. Trip computer "From start" or "From reset" Menu overview Using the = or ; button on the steering wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 201). Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 203) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 205) RAudio menu (Y page 206) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 207) RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 208) RServ. menu (Y page 210) RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 210) RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 213) The displays for the Audio Audio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly to those in your vehicle. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND Online. : ; = ? Distance Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From start or From reset. reset X The values in the From start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 204). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From start: start Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From reset. reset Z On-board computer and displays The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: 203 204 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays ECO display The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. Further information on the ECO display (Y page 159). Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays range :. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refuelled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. Digital speedometer Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select digital speedometer ;. Gearshift recommendation : Z may also be displayed. Observe the information on gearshift recommendation : for manual transmission (Y page 143) or for automatic transmission (shifting manually) (Y page 150). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendation is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display and not in the digital speedometer display. X Resetting values Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press a to confirm. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip meter R"From start" trip computer R"From reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the "ECO display", the values in the "From start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From start" trip computer, the values in the "ECO display" are also reset. X Menus and submenus Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows the navigation instructions. You can find further information on navigation in the separate multimedia system operating instructions. X Switch on the multimedia system; see separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active : Direction of travel ; Current road Change of direction without lane recommendation : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. This shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Route guidance active No change of direction announced : Road to which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a : ; = ? Distance to the destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road Symbol indicating "follow the road's course" change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multi-lane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. Z On-board computer and displays Navigation menu 205 206 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Other status indicators of the navigation system To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. X i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio BroadcastThe navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays route... or Calculating route... A new route is calculated. RRoad not mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognised, e.g. new roads, car parks or private land. RNo route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or a stopover. ing) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Audio player or audio media operation RNew Audio menu Selecting a radio station : Active station list ; Station with preset position The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed in addition if station ; has been stored. X Switch on the multimedia system and select radio; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. : Current track Audio files from various audio players or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system and activate audio CD or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until the desired track appears. If you press and hold the 9 or : button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio players or media support this function. If track information is saved on the audio player or media, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. DVD-Video operation Menus and submenus Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone, see the manufacturer's operating instructions. X Switch on the multimedia system; see separate operating instructions. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket (Y page 277). or X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RTelephone ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. i You can obtain further information about suitable mobile phones and connecting mobile phones via Bluetooth®: Rat any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejecting or ending a call You can reject or end a call any time even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end an incoming call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Authorise access to the phone book on the phone. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X Z On-board computer and displays Only for vehicles with COMAND Online: you can use the Audio menu to play video DVDs. X Switch on COMAND Online and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : appears. 207 Menus and submenus 208 On-board computer and displays X or If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialling. If there is more than one number for a particular name:press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. X Redialling The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialled in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialling. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. Assistance menu Introduction Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Assist. menu: RShowing the assistance graphic (Y page 208) RActivating/deactivating the Traffic Sign Assist message function (Y page 208) RDeactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 209) RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist (Y page 209) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 209) RActivating/deactivating (Y page 209) RActivating/deactivating (Y page 209) Blind Spot Assist Lane Keeping Assist Showing the assistance graphic Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assist. graphic. graphic X Press a to confirm. The multifunction display shows the distance display of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the assistance graphic. The assistance graphic shows you the status of and/or information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 190) RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 167) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 67) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 189) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 193) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. X Traffic Sign Assist In the Traffic Sign Assist menu, you can switch the Traffic Sign Assist message function on or off. When the message function is activated, detected traffic signs and information appear in the multifunction display for five seconds. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Traffic Sign Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate the message function: press a again. Menus and submenus Activating/deactivating ESP® Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP® on MercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 71). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 69). X Start the engine. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press 9 or : to select ESP ESP. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 252). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 217). Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brake Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 67). X Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive Sensitive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 189). X Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press a again. X Further information about Blind Spot Assist (Y page 192). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Lane Keeping Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a again to confirm. X Z On-board computer and displays Further information about Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 190). 209 Menus and submenus 210 Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 193). On-board computer and displays X Service menu Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: RCalling up display messages in the message memory (Y page 216) RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 315) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 285) Settings menu Introduction Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, in the Settings menu you have the following options: RChanging the instrument cluster settings RChanging the light settings RChanging the vehicle settings RChanging the heating settings RChanging the convenience settings RRestoring the factory settings Instrument cluster Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display unit Speed-/odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometres or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to select the Display unit Speed-/odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to the following: Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menu distance recorder and the trip meter Rtrip computer Rcurrent fuel consumption and approximate range Rnavigation instructions in the Navi menu Rcruise control Rspeed limiter RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC RASSYST PLUS service interval display Rtotal Switching the additional speedometer on/off United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status bar of the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature. The speed display is inverse to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Dig. speedo [mph] function. You will see the selected setting: on or off off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting permanent display United Kingdom: this function is unavailable. The Permanent display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display is inverse to your speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. Menus and submenus Lights Switching the daytime driving lights on/off The Daytime driving lights function can only be switched on with the engine turned off. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime driving lights function. If the Daytime driving lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on daytime driving lights (Y page 107). Vehicle Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC You can set the permanent limiter using the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Limit speed (winter tyres): function. You will see the current setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the permanent speed limiter in increments of ten (160 160 km/h to 240 km/h). km/h The Off setting switches the permanent speed limiter off. X Press the a button to store the entry. Further information on the permanent speed limiter (Y page 166). Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic door locks function. If the Automatic door locks function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the doors in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 15 km/h. For further information on the automatic locking feature; see (Y page 85). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking confirmation If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Heating Auxiliary heating departure time G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle, especially carbon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in enclosed spaces which do not have an extracZ On-board computer and displays Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent display: function. The current setting, outside temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]:, [mph]: appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. X 211 On-board computer and displays 212 Menus and submenus tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle away from the wind. G WARNING When the auxiliary heating is switched on, parts of the vehicle can become very hot. Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with: Rhot parts of the exhaust system exhaust gas itself There is a risk of fire. When the auxiliary heating is switched on, make sure that: Rthe Rno flammable materials come into contact with hot vehicle components Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the exhaust pipe unhindered Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials. ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventilation draws on the vehicle battery. After you have heated or ventilated the vehicle a maximum of two times, drive for a longer distance. Only vehicles with auxiliary heating have this function. In the Heating submenu, you can select a stored departure time or change a departure time. The auxiliary heating timer function calculates the switch-on time according to the outside temperature so that the vehicle is preheated by the departure time. When the departure time is reached, the auxiliary heating continues to heat for a further five minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary heating adopts the set air conditioning or THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly once a month for about ten minutes. Further information on auxiliary heating (Y page 126). Selecting the departure time or deactivating a selected departure time Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. The current setting appears. X Press a again. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer off (no timer active). X Press a to confirm. If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. X Changing the departure time Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Heating submenu. X Press a to confirm. The current setting appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select Change A, A Change B or Change C. C X Press a to confirm. You can now change the departure time. X Press the = or ; button to select the display to be changed: hours, minutes. X Press the : or 9 button to set the selected display. X Press the a button to store the entry. The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary heating button lights up. X Comfort Switching belt adjustment on/off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Menus and submenus For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 43). Switching the fold mirrors in when locking function on/off This function is only available when the vehicle is equipped with the electrical fold-in function. When you activate the Auto. fold-in mir‐ rors function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. fold-in mirrors function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 104), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. fold-in mirrors function. If the Auto. fold-in mirrors function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the exterior mirror in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Resetting to factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset all settings? function appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. Yes X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: the Limit speed (winter tyres) function of the permanent speed limiter can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. X AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Warm-up : ; = ? A B X Digital speedometer Gear indicator Upshift indicator Engine oil temperature Coolant temperature Transmission oil temperature Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual drive program. Engine and transmission oil temperature: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temperature ? and B are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or B in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid using the full output of the engine during this time. Z On-board computer and displays Press the : or 9 button to select the Belt adjustment function. When the Belt adjustment function is activated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X 213 214 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays SETUP Drive system Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport + Suspension Comfort Comfort/Sport Sport/Sport Sport + Transmission D/M M ESP® On On/Off Off or SPORT handling mode Sport SETUP displays the following information and functions: Rthe digital speedometer Rthe gear indicator Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension mode Rthe transmission position Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears. : ; = ? You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. Displaying the intermediate time Press the = or ; button to select Interm. Time. Time X Press a to confirm. The intermediate time is shown for five seconds. X Starting a new lap RACE TIMER Displaying and starting the RACETIMER : RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap X Press a to confirm New Lap. Lap : Lap ; RACETIMER i A maximum of 16 laps may be stored. The The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. Stopping the RACETIMER 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap Lap. Menus and submenus Press the % button on the steering wheel. Confirm Yes with a. The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3 and then press a to confirm Start Start, timing is continued. Resetting the current lap Stop the RACETIMER. Press the = or ; button to select Reset Lap. Lap X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". X X = Average speed ? Distance covered A Maximum speed This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. Lap evaluation Deleting all laps If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. : ; = ? A Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length Top speed during lap This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until a lap evaluation appears. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. Overall evaluation : RACETIMER overall evaluation ; Total time driven Z On-board computer and displays X X 215 Display messages 216 Display messages On-board computer and displays Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, these display messages are deleted as well. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 172) RParking (Y page 155) Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages. messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Display messages 217 Safety systems Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD currently unavaila‐ function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are temporarily unavailable. ble See Owner's Man‐ Adaptive brake lights and Active Brake Assist may have also failed. ual In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements, at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X !÷ ABS, BAS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. inoperative See Own‐ Adaptive brake lights and Active Brake Assist may have also failed. er's Manual The !, ÷, å and J warning lamps may also light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 218 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are temporarily unavailable. currently unavaila‐ Adaptive brake lights and Active Brake Assist may have also failed. ble See Owner's Man‐ In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the ual instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering movements at speeds of above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X ÷ ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. inoperative See Own‐ Adaptive brake lights and Active Brake Assist may have also failed. er's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. inoperative See Own‐ Adaptive brake lights and Active Brake Assist may have also failed. A warning tone sounds. er's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ! The red ! indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Key: turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. ! The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 157). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. Turn on the igni‐ tion to release the parking brake Release parking brake The red ! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 157). ! Parking brake See Owner's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 219 220 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or Turn the ignition off and then back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release):insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 157). X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Turn the ignition off and then back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Turn the ignition off and then back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 319). X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Turn the ignition off and then back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If you cannot apply the electric parking brake: X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: X Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release):insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 157). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake cannot be applied manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. or X Insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away (automatic emergency release). X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 221 On-board computer and displays 222 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red ! indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. Parking brake inop‐ erative If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released: X Turn the ignition off and then back on. X Apply or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The red ! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp is lit. The electric parking brake cannot be applied manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Brake immediately Vehicles with manual transmission: a malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). You can restart the engine. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up on the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Check brake fluid level G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the Mercedes-Benz Contact system are malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Active Brake Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Restart the engine. Check brake pad wear Inoperative Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. The situationActive Brake Assist: System inop‐ dependent braking assistance function may also have failed. erative X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE inopera‐ tive See Owner's Manual Important PRE-SAFE® functions have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 223 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 224 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar sensors dirty See Owner's Manual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: RDirt on sensors RHeavy rain or snow RDriving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RActive Brake Assist RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC A warning tone also sounds. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and driving safety systems will be available again. The display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear: X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 289). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. ü If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle. Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 44). ý If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle. G WARNING A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended level of protection. This poses an increased risk of injury. X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts (Y page 43). Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts (Y page 44). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster. Restraint sys. mal‐ function Consult workshop 6 Front left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Front right malfunction Consult workshop 6 Rear left malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop or Rear right malfunction Consult workshop 6 Left windowbag mal‐ function Consult workshop or Right windowbag malfunc‐ tion Consult work‐ shop G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information about the restraint system (Y page 39). The front left or right restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The rear left or right restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The left-hand or right-hand windowbag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left-hand or right-hand windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not triggered at all. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 225 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 226 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag is disabled during the journey although: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. G WARNING The front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of the vehicle. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: RA self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 47) RThe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Man‐ ual or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear on the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 47). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual The front-passenger front airbag is enabled during the journey although: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are placing additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The airbag may deploy unintentionally. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and child seat from the front-passenger seat. X Make sure that no objects are present that are applying additional weight to the seat. The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the centre console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: RA self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disabled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 47) RThe Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Man‐ ual or Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear on the multifunction display. If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly. Z 227 On-board computer and displays Display messages 228 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation feature (Y page 47). Lights i Vehicles with LED light bulbs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Left cornering light or Right cor‐ nering light b Left dipped beam or Right dipped beam The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions. b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. X Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions. b The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions. Trailer left tail lamporTrailer lamp Trailer right tail lamp Trailer left turn signalorTrailer signal Trailer right turn signal Trailer brake lamp b Rear left indicator or Rear right indi‐ cator The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages b Front left indica‐ tor or Front right indicator b Left mirror indica‐ tor or Right mirror indicator b Third brake lamp b Left brake lamporRight lamp Right brake lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The third brake lamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Left-hand tail lamp/ (Y page 111). brake lamp or Rightor hand tail lamp/ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. brake lamp b Left main beam or Right main beam The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear foglamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Number plate lamp Rear fog lamp Front left parking lamp or Front right parking lamp Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 229 On-board computer and displays 230 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b Reversing light The reversing lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 111). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Left tail lamp or Right tail lamp b The left or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Left daytime driv‐ (Y page 111). ing lamp or Right or daytime driving lamp X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The exterior lighting is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Malfunction See Own‐ er's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Check the fuses (Y page 308). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes as you do so. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. b You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps. X Turn the light switch to the L or à position. AUTO lights inoper‐ ative Switch off lights Switch on headlamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Adaptive Main-beam Assist currently Possible causes: unavailable See Own‐ RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. er's Manual RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Main-beam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Top up coolant See Owner's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine X cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 283). If you have to top up the coolant frequently: X ? Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked. The fan motor is faulty. If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 231 On-board computer and displays 232 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Stop vehi‐ cle Switch engine off G WARNING Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine has overheated can cause any fluids that may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge. If the temperature increases again: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. # See Owner's Manual The battery is no longer being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Rfaulty alternator Rtorn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Observe the instructions in the # See Owner's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 282). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 283). If you have to top up the engine oil frequently: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X 4 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refu‐ elling The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. ! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cooling system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged. X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest (Y page 282). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 283). If you have to top up the engine oil frequently: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X 4 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 282). X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 283). X Z 233 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 234 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ç There is very little fuel in the fuel tank. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated. X You must refuel at the nearest filling station. ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Reserve fuel level Replace air cleaner Clean the fuel fil‐ ter Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you get enough rest. Attention Assist: Take a break! À Attention Assist inoperative ë Off ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle has started to skid. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 172). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is no longer fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 172). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. currently unavaila‐ Possible causes: ble See Owner's Man‐ RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. ual RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Clean the windscreen. Lane Keeping Assist inoperative Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila‐ Possible causes: ble See Owner's Man‐ RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to ual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Restart the engine. Active Blind Spot Assist not availa‐ ble when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual. Manual Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer. You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Blind Spot Assist inoperative Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Pilot can‐ celled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 235 236 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 180). Parking Pilot inop‐ erative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 180). X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Parking Pilot ended The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. currently unavaila‐ Possible causes: ble See Owner's Man‐ RThe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. ual RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windscreen. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist inoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Distance Pilot off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 167). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. Distance Pilot available again Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 167). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Distance Pilot cur‐ rently unavailable See Owner's Manual Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes: RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RThe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message goes out. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Restart the engine. Distance Pilot inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is faulty. The situation-dependent braking assistance function may also have failed. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Distance Pilot pas‐ sive You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot - - - km/h A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met. X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 167). Distance Pilot and Limiter inoperative Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and speed limiter are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and Limiter inoperative Cruise control and speed limiter are faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Limiter passive If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode. The speed limitation is not active. X Drive slower than the stored speed and without kickdown. X Call up the last speed stored again. or X Set a new speed. When the display message disappears, the speed limitation is active. Z 237 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 238 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control - - - km/h RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example. RESP® is deactivated The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed. or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 162). or X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 209). Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been exceeded. 120 km/h! Maximum speed excee‐ In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!. km/h! ded X Drive more slowly. Display messages 239 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fitted new wheels and tyres Rthe tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 294). X Check and, if necessary, correct the tyre pressures. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 315). Check tyre pres‐ sures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inoperative Rectify tyre pres‐ sure The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres. X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 315). The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 315). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 317). Z On-board computer and displays Tyres Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. On-board computer and displays 240 G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 294). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 315). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Warning tyre defect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tyre impairs the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 294). Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila‐ ble No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong RF interference. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Wheel sensor(s) missing There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several tyres. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is activated after driving for a few minutes. Tyre press. monitor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Depress brake to start engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D without starting the engine. X Start the engine. X Depress the brake pedal. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò20 † you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. Apply brake to dese‐ You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R, N or D lect Park (P) posi‐ without depressing the brake pedal. tion X Depress the brake pedal. Z 241 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 242 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of vehicle rolling Transmis‐ sion not in P The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Close the driver's door fully. Without changing gear, consult work‐ shop You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary The vehicle is moving. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. Apply brake to select R You have attempted to shift from position D or N to position R. X Shift the transmission to position R when the brake pedal is depressed. Reversing not poss. Consult workshop The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot drive in reverse. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function X Transmission Mal‐ function Stop X The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Stop vehicle Shift to P Leave engine running The automatic transmission has overheated. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the automatic transmission is available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message goes out. X Auxiliary battery malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Until then, always shift the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Clutch overheated Avoid pulling away If necessary, quickly release and engage the clutch The clutch is under considerable load and the permitted operating temperature has been exceeded. A warning tone also sounds. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over longer distances. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Leave the engine running. The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running. or X If possible, drive on at a steady speed. X Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow the clutch to slip. The clutch may also cool down during the journey. It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutch has cooled down, the display message disappears. The clutch is fully operational again. For engine start depress clutch You have attempted to start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. X Depress the clutch pedal. X Restart the engine. The engine has stalled while pulling away, e.g. because the clutch pedal was released too quickly. X Depress the clutch pedal again. The engine starts automatically. X Slowly release the clutch pedal to pull away. Z 243 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 244 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Trans. oil overhea‐ ted Drive on with care Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated. Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive program are no longer available. Engine power output is reduced. X Allow the vehicle to cool down. 4matic currently unavailable 4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Drive on. The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly. When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels. 4matic inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. N The boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. M The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Close the bonnet. Active bonnet mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual C The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a malfunction or because it has already been triggered. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all doors. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged. A warning tone also sounds. Check trailer hitch lock G WARNING If the ball coupling is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Engage the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch in the end position (Y page 197). & The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 126). X Drive for a considerable distance. The battery charges. The auxiliary heating is operational again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient. & There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on (Y page 126). X Refuel at the nearest filling station. inoperative Battery Low inoperative Refuel vehicle & The auxiliary heating is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty. If the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down: inoperative See Own‐ X Make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heating, waiting er's Man. several minutes between each attempt (Y page 126). If the auxiliary heating does not switch on: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Ð Power steering mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual The power steering assistance is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra steering force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 245 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 246 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. Steering malfunc‐ tion See Owner's Manual _ Before starting the engine, turn the steering wheel. G WARNING The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly. X Insert the key into the ignition lock again. Telephone No service Your vehicle is outside the mobile phone network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 284). Wiper malfunction‐ ing The windscreen wipers are defective. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hazard warning lamps malfunction‐ ing The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. X Use the correct key. Key does not belong to vehicle  Replace key  Change key batteries The key needs to be replaced. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The key battery is discharged. X Change the battery(Y page 79). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Locate the key. Key not detected (red display message) Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Insert the key into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.  Key not detected (white display message) The key is currently undetected. Change the location of the key in the vehicle. X If the key still cannot be detected: Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary. X  The key is continually undetected. The key detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A Remove starting but‐ warning tone also sounds. ton, then insert key X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes Some systems perform a self test when the ignition is switched on. Some warning and indicator lamps may temporarily switch on or flash during the test. This behaviour is nothing to be concerned about. The warning and indicator lamps will alert you to a malfunction if they switch on or flash after the engine is started or while driving. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety On-board computer and displays Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J N The red brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. J N The red brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING Braking efficiency may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not correct the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Z On-board computer and displays Safety systems On-board computer and displays 250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) has been deactivated due to a fault. BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE® are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired as a result. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavailable. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution), the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE®, for example, are also deactivated. Possible causes: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired as a result. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is faulty. ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE®, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired as a result. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 251 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ÷å J N The red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired as a result. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has engaged due to a risk of skidding or because at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In exceptional cases (Y page 71) it may be better to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70). Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. G WARNING If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Reactivate ESP®. In exceptional cases (Y page 71) it may be better to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 70). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the ESP® system checked. M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 71). ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and PRE‑SAFE® are not available due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and PRESAFE® are temporarily unavailable. The adaptive brake lights and Active Brake Assist may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. Increased risk of skidding and/or accident! X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 20 km/h. The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ! N The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. This poses an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the restraint system checked. Further information about the restraint system (Y page 39). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 255 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a fault with the following, for example: REngine management RFuel injection system RExhaust system RIgnition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) RFuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 155). X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency mode is cancelled. The vehicle does not have to be checked. æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. The engine could be damaged if the coolant temperature is too high. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Engine On-board computer and displays 256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is not being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, making sure to observe the warning notes (Y page 283). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine has overheated can cause any fluids that may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, making sure to observe the warning notes (Y page 283). X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. X Increase the distance. · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist (Y page 67). Z On-board computer and displays Warning/ indicator lamp 257 258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Tyres Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING Underinflated tyres pose the following risks: tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre (Y page 294). X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 315). X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rthe h N The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to detect or register low tyre pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Operating system The section on the multimedia system in this manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and give way signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect driving recommendations if the actual road/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Operating system Overview General notes ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. If necessary, the display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the q control knob. Z Multimedia system General notes 259 Operating system 260 Adjusting the volume Back button Turn the q control knob. The volume changes: Rfor the currently set media source Rduring a traffic announcement or navigation message Rin hands-free mode during an active call You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. X Switching the sound on/off Press the 8 button on the control panel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i You will hear navigation messages even when the sound is muted. Multimedia system X Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND Online: navigation using hard drive Audio 20: navigation using SD memory card RCommunication functions RVehicle functions with system settings RFavourites functions Favourites Calling up and exiting favourites To call up: press the g button on the controller. X Select a favourite, e. g. Vehicle Vehicle. The favourites are displayed. X To exit: press the g button again. X Adding favourites Adding a predefined favourite Controller The controller in the centre console lets you: menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7 Rselect : ; = ? To add a new favourite To rename a selected favourite To move a selected favourite To delete a selected favourite Press the g button. Slide 6 the controller. The menu bar is shown. X Select Reassign Reassign. The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favourites are displayed. X X Operating system X Select a favourite. Add a favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Adding your own favourite Select Vehicle VehicleQClimate Climate control. control Press and hold the g button until the favourites are displayed. X Add a favourite at the desired position. If a favourite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Navigation mode Important safety notes G WARNING Operating the integrated information systems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes Correct functioning of the navigation system depends, amongst other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or multi-storey car parks. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND Online. Further information can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. The map displays the current vehicle position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Options OptionsQRoute Route settings. settings Notes for route types: X REco route route Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in all countries). RDynamic route only after request You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries). RCalculate alternative routes Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start Start, select the menu item Continue Continue. X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid options. options X Select a route option. Notes for route options: RDynamic RUse toll roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RUse vignette roads (not available in all countries) The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows temporary use of the route network, e. g. 10 days or 1 year. Entering an address Multimedia system: Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. The map displays the current vehicle position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Destination DestinationQAddress Address entry. entry Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rtown or postcode, street, house number Rcountry, town or postcode Rtown or postcode, centre Rstreet, town or postcode, junction X Z Multimedia system X 261 Operating system 262 Select Town Town. The town in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the town. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide 5 the controller. X Select the location. If available, the postcode is shown. If there are different postcodes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: Multimedia system X Rsearch for a keyword The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect travel guide destination (only available for selected European countries) Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Cancel current route guidance or Set as intermediate destination. destination Cancel current route guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as intermediate destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. Connecting the mobile phone Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: Select Vehicle VehicleQSystem System set‐ tingsQActivate tings Activate Bluetooth Bluetooth. X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mails i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Operating system Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorise (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorisation takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorisation. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Owner's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: Select Tel/ Tel/®QConnect Connect device Search for phones deviceQSearch phonesQStart Start search. search The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list X two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is cancelled. Repeat authorisation. Authorisation by entering a passkey (passcode): Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one- to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X i Mobile phones that are connected to the optionally available telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) are displayed separately in the device list. These are found below the entry MB SAP module phones. phones Symbol Explanation Switching between mobile phones Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorised. Ñ Mobile phone is authorised, but is not connected. If you have authorised more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: # Mobile phone is authorised and connected. Connecting the mobile phone Authorisation using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select the mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm the code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to X X Select Connect device. device Select a mobile phone from the device list. Telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) Introduction The module can be used as a permanently installed telephone with its own SIM card (Y page 265) or in conjunction with a mobile phone (Y page 265). If you wish to use the module in conjunction with your mobile telephone, the mobile phone must support the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile). Z Multimedia system Searching for and authorising (connecting) a mobile phone 263 264 Operating system The following functions are available using the module: Rhands-free mode Rdata modem mode (Y page 265) Rsending and receiving text messages (Y page 266) Raccess to the phone book of the mobile phone (if supported by the mobile phone) (Y page 266) Rcharging a mobile phone via the USB connection (Y page 266) Mounting the module in the stowage compartment of the centre console X Insert USB cable : into the module. X Slide the module into the bracket until it audibly engages. X Connect the USB cable to the USB port. Activating and connecting the module Multimedia system i The module is not available in all vehicles, depending on the equipment. Installing the module Multimedia system: Select Tel/ Tel/®. Module: install (Y page 264). X Press and hold button ;. X As soon as indicator lamp : starts flashing yellow, release the button. The indicator lamp continues to flash yellow. X X Mounting the module in the stowage compartment of the centre console X Slide module ; into bracket : until it audibly engages. Connecting the module via a USB cable (COMAND Online) Multimedia system: Select Connect deviceQConnect device Connect MB SAP moduleQStart module Start search. search The module is searched for and connected. X To authorise a mobile phone: select Start search and follow the instructions of the multimedia system. Further information on authorising and connecting mobile phones (Y page 263). X Operating system SIM card mode Inserting a SIM card 265 RBluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and must be made visible to other devices Rthe Bluetooth® SIM Access Profile of the mobile phone must be activated Authorising and connecting a mobile phone Multimedia system: Select Connect deviceQSearch device Search for phones SAP phone phonesQSAP phoneQStart Start searchQMB search MB SAP module phones X Select the mobile phone. X Enter and confirm any 16-digit PIN. X Enter and confirm the same PIN on the mobile phone. X Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into the multimedia system and confirm. i Please observe the messages in the mobile phone. If necessary, you will be asked to confirm further profile requests. X With the contact surface facing down, insert SIM card : into the SIM card slot until it engages. After a SIM card is inserted in the module, a Bluetooth® connection with another mobile phone is no longer possible. Any existing Bluetooth® connection is ended upon SIM card insertion. Connecting the mobile phone General notes Before using your mobile phone with the module and the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorise it. Requirements The mobile phone can be authorised and connected to the module if: Rthe module is installed (Y page 264) and activated in the multimedia system (Y page 264) Rno SIM card is inserted in the module Rthe mobile phone has no active Bluetooth® connection to another device Rthe mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® SAP profile (SIM Access Profile) Depending on the type of mobile phone, different settings must be changed on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Switching between mobile phones If you have authorised more than one mobile phone on the module, you can switch between the individual phones. X Select the mobile phone under MB SAP mod‐ ule phones. phones X Confirm the connection request (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Where necessary, enter the SIM card PIN into the multimedia system and confirm. data modem mode X or Connect the mobile phone to the module (Y page 265). Insert the SIM card into the SIM card slot on the module (Y page 265). X Before connecting for the first time, enable the module for Internet access and select the network provider in the multimedia system (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Use as a data modem is automatically activated. X Activate/deactivate data roaming (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Z Multimedia system X Operating system 266 For further information on data mode without telephony with COMAND Online (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Charging a mobile phone Settings Storing/deleting the SIM card PIN Multimedia system: Select Connect device deviceQMB MB SAP module phones X Highlight the mobile phone. X To select G: navigate to the right. X Activate O or deactivate ªStore Store PIN. PIN Multimedia system X Transferring the phone book In order to use the phone book of the mobile phone via the multimedia system, the phone book must be transferred using the module. The transfer of data may take up to ten minutes. Transmission occurs automatically after a Bluetooth® connection is automatically established. Text messages Requirements The module is connected with the mobile phone (Y page 265) or is being used in the SIM card mode (Y page 265). Activating/deactivating text message downloading from the mobile phone Dial number Function 00080 Text message downloading is deactivated. 00081 Text message downloading is activated. For further information on receiving text messages when using the telephone module (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Slide cover ; on the module in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X Connect the mobile phone via a USB data cable with USB port :. X Media mode General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Owner's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) (Y page 267) RCD RDVD (COMAND Online) RSD cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® i Information on the single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Owner's Manual). Using the device list Multimedia system: Select Media MediaQDevices Devices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played back. X Operating system 267 Inserting/removing an SD card Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you Multimedia system should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is on the control panel. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards. Removing an SD card Press the SD card. The SD card is ejected. X Remove the SD card. X Connecting USB devices There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 266). Z 268 Stowage areas Loading guidelines Stowing and features G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. Never drive with the boot lid open. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following notes when loading and transporting a load: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). Rthe boot is the preferred place to store objects. Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the boot as possible. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. Ralways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. Ralways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage nets to transport loads and luggage. Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening components that are suitable for the weight and size of the load. Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage areas Stowage compartments Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268). Stowage areas Glove compartment To open: pull handle : and open glove compartment flap ;. X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; upwards until it engages. There is a pen holder at the top of the glove compartment flap. X Spectacles compartment X To open: press marking :. Make sure that the spectacles compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the front centre console Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever To open: press the marking on cover :. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an ashtray in the centre console instead of the stowage compartment. X Stowage compartment in front of the armrest (vehicles with automatic transmission) Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever X To open: press the marking on cover :. i You can remove the non-slip mat and the insert for cleaning. When removing the insert you will have to overcome some slight resistance. Z Stowing and features Front stowage compartments 269 Stowage areas 270 Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. On vehicles with a fire extinguisher instead of a stowage compartment, the fire extinguisher is installed under the driver's seat. X To open: on vehicles with moveable armrests, make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost position. X Press button : and fold the armrest up. Stowing and features X Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a longitudinal direction. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space: Ra multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player (see the separate operating instructions) Ra mobile phone bracket (Y page 277) Rear stowage compartments Stowage compartment in the rear centre console Stowage compartment under the driver's and front-passenger seat G WARNING If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the stowage compartment, the cover is unable to restrain the objects. Objects may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum load of the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the boot. The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 1.2 kg. X To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an open stowage space above the stowage compartment. Luggage nets Luggage nets are located: the front-passenger footwell Ron the back of the driver's and frontpassenger seat Ron the left and right-hand side in the boot Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 268). Rin Stowage areas To open: fold down seat armrest :. X Pull the centre head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (Y page 99). X RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. RObjects or loads in the boot cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. ! Before folding the backrest in the rear compartment forwards, make sure that the rear compartment armrest and the cupholder are folded in. They may otherwise be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the boot capacity. Folding the rear seat backrest forwards and back Folding the rear seat backrest forwards Slide locking mechanism = in the direction of the arrow. X Swing flap ; fully to the side. Flap ; is held open by a magnet. X To close: swing flap ; in the boot back until it engages. X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary. X Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268). Enlarging the luggage compartment Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. Fully insert the backrest head restraints if necessary (Y page 100). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forwards. The corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold backrest : forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Z Stowing and features Through-loading facility in the rear compartment 271 Stowage areas 272 RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :. Stowing and features Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. : Lashing eyelets Stowage well under the boot floor Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 100). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Under the boot floor you can find a bracket for TIREFIT and the vehicle tool kit, etc. X To open: pull handle : up. Securing a load Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 268). RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Features To enlarge the boot you can remove the boot floor. X To remove: lift the boot floor almost to rain trough ; and pull it out. 273 You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical Data" section (Y page 333). An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. To insert: place the boot floor at the bottom in the centre. X Hold sides of boot floor = and press in the direction of the arrow until it engages in hooks ?. X Open and fold the covers : upwards carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When a load is transported on the roof, the vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the handling changes. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the handling as well as steering and braking characteristics are severely affected. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the maximum roof load and adapt your driving style. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is fitted you can: Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof fully Ropen the boot lid fully Features Cup holders Important safety notes G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable Z Stowing and features Attaching the roof carrier 274 Features Stowing and features size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid. G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Two coin holders = and a card holder ; can be found in the cup holder. The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. X To remove: lift the cup holder up : and out with a brief tug. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 268). The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles: Rfront: capacity up to 1.0 l Rrear: capacity up to 0.5 l Cup holder in the front centre console To fit: insert cup holder : into lateral curved sections ; in the stowage compartment. When doing so, insert the cup holder in such a way that the cant of the upper section of the cup holder faces forwards. X Press cup holder : downwards until it engages on the right and left-hand sides. X Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : Cup holders Features 275 Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Sun visors Overview Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and out. X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X : ; = ? A Mirror light Retainer Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Rear-compartment ashtray Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Z Stowing and features Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X Features 276 To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases. X Lift insert ; up and out. X To fit the insert: fit insert ; from above into the holder and press down until it engages. X X Stowing and features Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Use the cigarette lighter only when road and traffic conditions permit. 12 V sockets General notes Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as mobile phone chargers. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. X Socket in the front centre console Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of the cover. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of the socket. X Socket in the rear-compartment centre console Pull the cover out by the top of its handle edge. X Lift up the cover of the socket. X Socket in the boot Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X X Lift up the cover of socket :. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on these requirements can be found in the separate operating instructions. To open: press cover : briefly. To make an emergency call: press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz emergency call centre. X After the emergency call, close cover :. You will see a message if: Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre cannot be made Ra call has not been automatically forwarded to the public emergency call centre In this case, dial the 112 emergency number on your mobile phone. You can find more information on the MercedesBenz emergency call system in the separate operating instructions. X X Mobile phone Important safety notes G WARNING Operating mobile communications equipment while driving distracts you from paying attention to traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Use this device only when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communications equipment in the vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures: Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in the vehicle Rthat mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones is minimised An exterior aerial has the following advantages: Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial Information on fitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) (Y page 325). General notes There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. More information on suitable mobile phones, mobile phone brackets and on connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with the multimedia system can be obtained: Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Using a mobile phone To connect a mobile phone to the exterior aerial and charge it, insert it into the mobile phone bracket. Z 277 Stowing and features Features Features 278 Open the telephone compartment (Y page 270). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the preinstalled fitting; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate installation instructions for the mobile phone fitting. X Mobile phone bracket in the stowage compartment i The mobile phone can also be operated Stowing and features without being in the bracket. However, the charging function and aerial function are not available. In order to use Bluetooth® (SAP profile) on your telephone module, you must first insert the telephone module into the pre-installed fitting. This connects it to the exterior aerial. If you wish to charge the mobile phone, you must connect it to a USB port. Further information on the telephone module with Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual. Operating the mobile phone You can operate the phone using the 6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 207). When you remove the key from the ignition lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from the vehicle. You can then no longer make calls using the hands-free system. If a call is active and you remove the key from the ignition lock, the conversation is transferred over to the mobile phone. It is then possible to continue the conversation on the mobile phone. You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to improve access to the stowage space beneath it. Further information about the stowage compartment (Y page 270). X To fold the bracket up: press button :. X To fold the bracket down: press the bracket down and allow it to engage. Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. Features Slide the seat backwards. To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat away from retainers ;. X Remove the floormats. 279 X Stowing and features X Retrofitted anti-glare film Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the windows can interfere with radio/mobile telephone reception. This is particularly the case for conductive or metallic-coated films. You can obtain information about anti-glare film from a qualified specialist workshop. Z 280 Engine compartment Engine compartment Important safety notes G WARNING An unlocked bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlock the bonnet when driving. Before every trip, ensure that the bonnet is locked. Maintenance and care jewellery and watches items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. Rkeep Bonnet G WARNING When being opened and closed, the bonnet may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons in the range of movement of the bonnet. Open and close the bonnet only when nobody is in the range of movement. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch Rremove off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas surround- ing moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. If you touch the live components, you could receive an electric shock. There is a danger of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operating principle ! An active bonnet that had been triggered must be repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet function will then be available again. The additional pedestrian protection provided by the active bonnet will then be restored. The active bonnet is available only in certain countries. The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury to pedestrians in certain accident situations. Raising the active bonnet increases the clearance to hard components, such as the engine. If the active bonnet has been triggered, it is raised at the rear in the area around the hinge by approximately 60 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the triggered active bonnet yourself. If the active bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. Resetting G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Engine compartment Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. The bonnet is released. X Opening the bonnet G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Reach into the gap between the bonnet and the radiator trim and press bonnet catch lever ; to the left. X Raise the bonnet. X G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded away from the windscreen. Otherwise, you could damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. X X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yellow retaining clip =. Z Maintenance and care With your hand flat, push down active bonnet : in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows) until you feel it engage. If you can raise the active bonnet slightly at the rear in the area around the hinges, it is not engaged correctly. Repeat the step. If the bonnet can then still be raised, drive directly to a qualified specialist workshop. Do not drive faster than 100 km/h. X 281 Engine compartment 282 Closing the bonnet Raise the bonnet slightly and, at the same time, remove support strut ? from yellow retaining clip =. X Swing support strut ? down and press it into bracket A until it engages. X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Do not press the bonnet closed. Open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force. X Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Maintenance and care Engine oil General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed at a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. Example: vehicles with a diesel engine (except the CLA 180 d model) Example: CLA 180 d model X All models except CLA 180 d: pull out oil dipstick :. X The CLA 180 d model: release the oil filler cap and pull it out together with integrated oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. Engine compartment 283 Topping up engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system: RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired RUse of engine oil additives ! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with too Example: engine oil filler cap Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. X Top up the engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Make sure that the cap locks securely into place. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 282). Further information on engine oil (Y page 330). X Checking and adding other service products Checking the coolant level G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Open the cap slowly to release the pressure. ! The coolant level must only be checked and corrected when the engine has cooled down (coolant temperature under 40 †). Checking the coolant level when the coolant temperature is over 40 † can lead to damage to the engine or engine cooling system. much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Z Maintenance and care G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. ASSYST PLUS 284 G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant level only if the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 40 †. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Slowly turn cap : anti-clockwise and to relieve excess pressure. X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, top up with coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Further information on coolant (Y page 332). Maintenance and care X Windscreen washer system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Top up with the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 litre, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to top up the washer fluid (Y page 246). Further information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 332). X X ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. You can find information on the type of service and service intervals in the Service Booklet. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 282). ASSYST PLUS RService A in .. days RService A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. For certain countries only: the position after the letter A or B indicates any necessary additional maintenance work. If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of this display, you will receive a statement on the associated costs. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding service messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch the ignition on. Press the = or ; button to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Information about service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, for example: RRegular city driving with frequent intermediate stops RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances RFor frequent use in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces RIf the engine is often left idling for long periods RIn particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used. In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z Maintenance and care The multifunction display shows a service message for a few seconds, e.g.: 285 286 Care Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. Maintenance and care ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be damaged if the transmission is in another position. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely. Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off (OFF button is depressed/ airflow control is turned to position 0). Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off the wax from the windscreen and the windscreen wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. Washing by hand Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. Care High-pressure cleaning equipment G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rplug connectors Rlamps Rseals Rtrim elements Rventilation slots Damage to seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. ! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the parts of the vehicle covered with the film and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork shiny. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matt effect: Rvigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matt paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. Z Maintenance and care Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all traces of road salt deposits carefully and as soon as possible. X 287 288 Care These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels with a clear matt finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning vehicle parts Maintenance and care Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis components. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time. Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive cleaning agents, solvents or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of the windows/ windscreen. Do not touch the inside of the windows/windscreen with hard items such as an ice scraper or a ring. Otherwise, the windows/windscreen could be damaged. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning the wiper blades G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the bonnet. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windscreen could be damaged if the wiper arm hits against it suddenly. Care 289 Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a damp cloth. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. X Cleaning the mirror turn signal ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the reversing camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the reversing camera with a high-pressure cleaner. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pressure cleaner, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. X To clean the reversing camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Z Maintenance and care ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths 290 Care Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents, such as sanitary cleanser or wheel cleaner. Maintenance and care ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers should not be polished with a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For optimal care, the finishers should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this. For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfibre cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing the vehicle. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the trailer tow hitch H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions. Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush. Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. X X i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. Rabrasive Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to Care ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come in contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change colour temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning wood trim and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used frequently, this can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to make sure that the appearance and comfort of the covers are retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, e.g.: Runevenness in structure Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rsubtle colour differences These are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Seat covers from other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub carefully, and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an Z Maintenance and care become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. 291 Care 292 accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the roof lining and carpets Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care X Where will I find...? Where will I find...? 293 First-aid kit Warning triangle Removing/replacing the warning triangle X X To remove: open the boot lid. Press warning triangle holder : in the direction of the arrow and open. Lift retaining clip = and remove warning triangle ;. X To replace: place warning triangle ; back into warning triangle holder :. X Close warning triangle holder : and push up to secure. X Open the boot lid. Remove first-aid kit :. Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing items. Fire extinguisher Setting up the warning triangle The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front of the driver's seat. X Pull tab : upwards. X Remove fire extinguisher ;. X X Fold feet = out to the side. Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using press stud :. Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements for each individual country. Breakdown assistance X 294 Flat tyre Vehicle tool kit Breakdown assistance General notes Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well under the boot floor. Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit: the tyrechange tool kit is in the stowage well under the boot floor. Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel, see "Removing the emergency spare wheel" (Y page 324). Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a tyre are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tyrechanging tools are required and approved for performing a tyre change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for example: Rjack Rwheel chock RWheel wrench RCentring pin i The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load-bearing capacity of the jack can be found on the adhesive label on the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit : Tyre inflation compressor ; Tyre sealant bottle = Towing eye Open the boot lid. Swing the boot floor upwards (Y page 272). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 296) or remove it. Towing eye = is located under tyre inflation compressor :. X X i The tyre inflation compressor weighs approximately 0.8 kg. The tyre inflation compressor is maintenancefree. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit Open the boot lid. Swing the boot floor upwards (Y page 272). X Remove the tyre-change tool kit. The tyre-change tool kit contains: RJack RWheel wrench ROne pair of gloves RFolding wheel chock X X Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: with run-flat char- RMOExtended tyres (tyres acteristics) (Y page 295) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tyres. Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 294) Ran emergency spare wheel (certain countries only) (Y page 323) Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and fitting a wheel (Y page 318). X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they get out of the vehicle. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. X Place the warning triangle a suitable distance away (Y page 293). Observe legal requirements. X MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) General notes With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. The affected tyre must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the "MOExtended" marking that appears on the tyre sidewall. You will find this marking next to the tyre size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index. MOExtended tyres may be used only in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 239) Rcheck Rif in the display mes- the tyre for damage driving on, observe the following notes The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 80 km when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 30 km when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible in run-flat mode depends on the: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/ manoeuvres, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tyre pressure loss warning appears on the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. When replacing one or all tyres, observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tyres: Rsize Rtype and Rthe "MOExtended" marking If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyre may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tyre). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Z 295 Breakdown assistance Flat tyre 296 Flat tyre Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The faulty tyre must be replaced. Rthere TIREFIT kit Breakdown assistance Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò20 †. G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation compres- sor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tyre inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit Flat tyre Remove filler hose B and connector = from the bottom section of tyre inflation compressor housing ;. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : until the connector engages. X With sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tyre sealant bottle : into the holder of tyre inflation compressor ;. Yellow cap A must engage in both hooks. X X X X Remove cap from valve C on faulty tyre. Screw filler hose D onto valve C. Insert connector = into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 276). Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press on and off switch ? on the tyre inflation compressor to ON. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes, see "Tyre pressure reached" (Y page 298). If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes, see "Tyre pressure not reached" (Y page 297). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clear water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. X Tyre pressure not reached If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filler hose. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 10 m. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre Z Breakdown assistance Do not remove any foreign objects that have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the boot floor (Y page 294). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X 297 Flat tyre 298 pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure reached G WARNING Breakdown assistance A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver. If a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filler hose. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filler hose. X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X G WARNING If the required tyre pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting, requires specialist knowledge and the use of special tools. Therefore, always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about ABS (Y page 66) and ESP® (Y page 69). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Electrostatic charge is created, for example: Rby wearing synthetic-fibre clothing Rby friction between clothing and the seat Rif you pull or push the battery across carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you rub the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. Z Breakdown assistance Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X 299 300 Battery (vehicle) H Environmental note Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing; in particular, gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Breakdown assistance ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Service Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the bat- tery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Keep children at a safe distance. Observe this Owner's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In such cases, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. When you park the vehicle, remove the key if you do not require any electrical consumers. The Jump-starting Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jump-start connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 301). X Open the bonnet. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and earth point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 301). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. This device permits charging of the battery while it is installed. Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. Z Breakdown assistance vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will have to: Rset the clock using the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. Rreset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 104) 301 302 Jump-starting G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. Breakdown assistance G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Jump-starting 303 Make sure that: jump leads are not damaged. RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage neutral. X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc. X Open the bonnet. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first. X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes. X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Each time, begin at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads. X Close the bonnet. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. Z Breakdown assistance RThe 304 Towing away and tow-starting i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing away and tow-starting Important safety notes G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. Breakdown assistance Rthe G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rcar/trailer Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 326). ! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing away Rin a car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: RSecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. RMake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing eyes or, if available, to the trailer tow hitch. RObserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. Towing away and tow-starting For towing distances over 50 km, the front axle or the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. 305 Fitting/removing the towing eye Fitting the towing eye ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. The automatic transmission may otherwise switch to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door which could damage the transmission. not be tow-started. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing and tow-starting. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of an accident or breakdown, you have the following options: Rtransporting the vehicle As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported. Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the transmission to position N on vehicles with automatic transmission The function of the electric parking brake and the parking lock is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a system malfunction: Rit may not be possible to apply the released parking brake or Rit may not be possible to shift the transmission to position P Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the radio. Deactivate the automatic locking feature before towing the vehicle (Y page 211). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Deactivate tow-away protection before the vehicle is towed away (Y page 74). The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are in the bumpers. They are located at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool kit under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 294). Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is located under the tyre inflation compressor. X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove cover : from the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch only have a bracket at the front for the screw-in towing eye. If you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball coupling (Y page 197) and secure the towbar to it . Removing the towing eye Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor (Y page 294). X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: replace the tyre inflation compressor. X X Z Breakdown assistance ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must 306 Towing away and tow-starting Towing the vehicle with the front axle raised When towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 304). Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the front axle raised. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed with both axles on the ground or be loaded and transported. Breakdown assistance ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 134). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P. or X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage neutral. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 74). X Deactivate automatic locking (Y page 211). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 109). X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0 and leave the key in the ignition lock. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 304). X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use the key instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 134). Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing away the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. Vehicles with manual transmission: Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully and engage neutral. X X Vehicles with manual or automatic transmission: Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 109). X X i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the turn signals for the desired direction flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning lamps start flashing again. Towing away and tow-starting Transporting the vehicle 4MATIC vehicles or vehicles with automatic transmission 307 The towing eye or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage neutral. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Shift the transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Secure the vehicle against rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the key to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged. Vehicles with 4MATIC may only be either towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 301). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatic transmission. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 301). Before tow-starting, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe battery is connected Rthe engine has cooled down Rthe exhaust system has cooled down When tow-starting, it is important that you observe the safety notes (Y page 304) and the legal requirements in each respective country. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 109). X Fit the towing eye (Y page 305). X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing rope. Z Breakdown assistance ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Electrical fuses 308 When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and continue to keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow-start the vehicle. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X When the engine has been started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. X Remove the towing eye (Y page 305). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. Breakdown assistance X Electrical fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Only use fuses marked with an "S". Components or systems could otherwise be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components in the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 309). If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Before replacing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 309). X Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before opening the bonnet. Electrical fuses 309 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell Open the bonnet. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. X To open: open clamps ;. X Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X X X X To release cover =, press retaining clamp ;. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow to the catch. X Remove cover = forwards. Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the lower right-hand side of cover =. X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side of the fuse box into the retainer. Cover = engages in the retainers. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly. X Fold back perforated floor covering :. X Fit the floormats. X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. Close the bonnet. Z Breakdown assistance To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the back into openings = on the fuse box. X Fold down cover :. X To open: open the front-passenger door. Remove the floormat. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the direction of the arrow. X X 310 Operation Rdesignation Further information regarding wheels and tyres can be found under "Wheel/tyre combinations" (Y page 323). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Information on tyre pressures can be found: Rin the tyre pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 154) Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 313) Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. Rtype i Further information on wheels and tyres can Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype Wheels and tyres G WARNING A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tyres without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tyre. replace the flat tyre with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Operation Information on driving Check the tyre pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure not to squash the tyre. If you cannot avoid driving over obstacles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. Regular checking of wheels and tyres G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Operation Check wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tyres after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tyres Rpunctures Rtears in the tyres Rbulges on the tyres Rdeformation or severe corrosion on the wheels Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 311). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock to make it easier to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Do not fit any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pressure monitors. Check the pressure of all tyres regularly as well as prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary (Y page 313). Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 323). The service life of a tyre depends on various factors, including the following: RDriving style RTyre pressure RMileage Notes on the tyre tread G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tyre tread depth is reached. RM+S Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. Pay special attention to country-specific requirements for tyre approval. These requirements may stipulate a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of a specific tyre type in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. You can find further information regarding tyres at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RUse only tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe here the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 295). RFit only tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. They reach their full performance only after this distance. Z Wheels and tyres Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. 311 312 Winter operation RDo not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 323). Wheels and tyres MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. MOExtended tyres may be used only in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system or with an activated tyre pressure monitor and only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with a flat tyre (Y page 295). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 318). Driving with summer tyres At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. M+S tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tyres will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tyres have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tyres you have fitted. If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maximum permissible speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning label in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum design speed of the vehicle using the permanent limiter to the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 166). Tyre pressure Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are fitted to the rear wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the rear wheels fit snow chains in pairs to the front wheels. Ralways ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you wish to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/ tyre combinations. Permitted wheel/tyre combinations (Y page 323). RUse snow chains only if the road surface is completely snow-covered. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to fit snow chains. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Rdo not use Parking Pilot when snow chains are fitted (Y page 180). You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 70). This allows the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving increased propulsive force (cut). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 323). Tyre pressure Tyre pressure specifications G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres including the spare wheel: Rat least every two weeks the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. offroad driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. Rwhen G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pressure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. Z Wheels and tyres When you have fitted the M+S tyres: Check the tyre pressures (Y page 313). X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 315). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 317). Information about driving with an emergency spare wheel (Y page 323). X 313 314 Tyre pressure G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Wheels and tyres Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. The recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 154). Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 324). Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear axle is the maximum value stated in the tyre pressure table inside the fuel filler flap. Additionally, the tyre pressure table may also state tyre pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may vary; for more information, please refer to the vehicle documents. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all tyres approved at the factory for this vehicle. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is valid only for that tyre size. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not give any reliable indication of the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor, you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer. If possible, correct tyre pressures only when the tyres are cold. The tyres are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1.6 km Depending on the ambient temperature, the vehicle speed and the load on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus the tyre pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tyres. Correct the tyre pressure only if it is too low for the current operating condition. Driving with a tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rcause increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aquaplaning) The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values that offer you good driving comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. Tyre pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the rotational speed of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of tire pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. Tyre pressure Important safety notes The tyre pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 313). The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure loss warning system is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of air, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of air, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted on your vehicle Rroad conditions are wintry Ryou are driving on a loose surface (e.g. sand or gravel) Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration) Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof) Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged the wheels or tyres Rfitted new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre pressures are set properly on all four tyres for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tyre pressures can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, this incorrect value will be monitored. X Observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 313). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tyre press. now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X or Press the % button. If the Tyre press. now OK? message appears, press the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tyre pressure monitor General notes If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor functions only if the corresponding sensors are fitted to all wheels. Z Wheels and tyres You can recognise the tyre pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator active Restart with OK message which appears in the multifunction display in the Serv. Serv.menu. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 315). 315 316 Tyre pressure Information on tyre pressures is shown on the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre is shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example). For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tyre pressure electronically" section (Y page 316). Wheels and tyres Important safety notes It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation (Y page 313). Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tyre pressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tyre pressure (Y page 317). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. This ensures that a warning message appears only if the tyre pressure drops significantly. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 313). The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of air, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering manoeuvres. The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp on the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up, a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunction in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: RIf the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tyre pressure on one or more tyres is significantly too low. The tyre pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. RIf the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears on the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 239). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tyre pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tyre pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the fault has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning lamp goes out after you have driven for a few minutes. The tyre pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a filling station using a pressure gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. cordless headphones, twoway radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Checking the tyre pressure electronically Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed in the multifunction display. If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driv‐ ing message is shown. After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tyre pressure values to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre pressure monitor active X Tyre pressure Warning messages of the tyre pressure monitor If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tyres, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tyre pressure warning lamp then lights up: RIf the Please correct tyre pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre is too low. The tyre pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Tyre pressure Check tyre(s) message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The tyres must be checked. RIf the Tyre pressure Caution Tyre mal‐ function message appears in the multifunction display, the tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The tyres must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tyres" section (Y page 239). If the position of the wheels on the vehicle is changed, the tyre pressures may be displayed in the wrong positions for a short time. After a few minutes of driving, this is rectified and the tyre pressures are displayed in the correct positions. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tyre pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tyre pressure monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure values. Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 313). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 133). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tyre pressure. pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tyre pressure for each tyre or the Tyre pres‐ sures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving message. X Press the : button. The multifunction display shows the Use current pressures as new reference values message. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The new tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number Argentina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Z Wheels and tyres message is shown instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. After an emergency spare wheel has been fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. 317 318 Changing a wheel Country Radio type approval number Abu Dhabi TRA, Registered NO ER0092100/12 Dubai TRA, Registered NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered NO ER0076990/11 Dealer NO: DA0047074/10 Wheels and tyres Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 Mhz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philippines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Singapore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Changing a wheel Flat tyre You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 294). Information on driving with MOExtended tyres in the event of a flat tyre can be found under "Breakdown assistance" (Y page 295). Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emergency spare wheel is fitted according to the description under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 319). Interchanging the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Interchange front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure mon- itor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchanging the front and rear wheels of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 318). The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders, while rear tyres wear more in the centre. On vehicles that have front and rear wheels of the same size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. Changing a wheel wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tyre-changing tools may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RWheel wrench Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tyres are fitted corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels 319 Securing the vehicle against rolling away Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably dark place if they are not being used. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. Fitting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the key from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the key having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 133). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tyre-change tool kit from the vehicle. X In addition, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 155). i Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a tyre are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit (Y page 294). The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to secure the vehicle against rolling away, e.g. when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Insert the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Z Wheels and tyres X 320 Changing a wheel Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. Vehicles with steel wheels: the hub cap covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the wheel trim. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: Wheels and tyres Ronly use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. If the jack is used incorrectly, it could tip over while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not permissible to use it to perform maintenance work under the vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Rbefore raising the vehicle, safeguard it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Do not release the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. use a rubber mat on tiles. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure that the distance between the underside of the tyres and the ground does not exceed 3 cm. Rnever place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. Rdo not lie under the raised vehicle. Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rdo not open or close a door or the boot lid when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when raising the vehicle. X Using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Jacking points The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, Changing a wheel the vehicle has covers fitted next to the jacking points on the outer sills. 321 Turn ratchet ring spanner A until jack ? sits completely on jacking point = and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet ring spanner A until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ; upwards. Take ratchet ring spanner A out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack ? so that the letters AUF are visible. X Position jack ? at jacking point =. X Fitting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 318). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned vertically under the jacking point. Z Wheels and tyres Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equipment) threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Changing a wheel 322 Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X Wheels and tyres Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the vehicle again. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: use the cover of the outer sill. X Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust if necessary. Observe the recommended tyre pressure (Y page 313). If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor only once the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. X Emergency spare wheel General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 313). The value on the wheel is valid. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Further information about wheels, tyres and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. ! Large wheels: the lower the section width for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll comfort and suspension comfort are reduced and the risk of damage to the wheels and tyres as a result of driving over obstacles increases. The recommended tyre pressures for various operating conditions can be found in the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap. Further information on tyre pressure (Y page 313). Check tyre pressures regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit the vehicle: Rwith tyres of the same size across an axle (left/right) Rwith the same type of tyre (summer tyres, MOExtended tyres, winter tyres) Exception: it is permissible to fit a different type or make in the event of a flat tyre. Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 295). Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Emergency spare wheel Important safety notes G WARNING The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fitting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. To prevent hazardous situations: RAdapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emergency spare wheel if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. Z Wheels and tyres Wheel and tyre combinations 323 324 Emergency spare wheel ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel briefly if the dimensions are different to those of the wheel being replaced. Removing the emergency spare wheel not switch off ESP®. RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel in question replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre type are correct. RDo When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the vehicle's maximum design speed of 80 km/h. You should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres, including the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 313). The value on the wheel is valid. Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels. Wheels and tyres General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted emergency spare wheels at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. If you are driving with the emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor only once the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: after an emergency spare wheel has been fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the position where the emergency spare wheel is fitted is not the same as the current tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel. Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is secured in emergency spare wheel bag : in the boot. X Open the boot lid. X Release securing straps ; on emergency spare wheel bag :. X Remove emergency spare wheel bag : with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. X Open emergency spare wheel bag : and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 319). Vehicle electronics i The technical data were determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data apply to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics ! Only have work carried out on the engine electronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components and connector leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may otherwise wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved aerial positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and to the health of others. The use of an exterior aerial takes into consideration the scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on operating mobile phones (Y page 277). The following aerial positions may be used for the correct installation of RF transmitters: Technical data Information on technical data If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the vehicle electronics, e.g.: Approved aerial positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear wings ? Boot lid Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to an i On vehicles with a panorama sliding sun- exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. 325 roof, fitting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear wings, it is recommended that you position the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Z 326 Identification plates Technical data Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial connections intended for use with the basic fittings. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3–54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74–88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144–174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380–460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400–460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) Open the front right-hand door. You will see the vehicle identification plate :. Vehicle identification plate (example: vehicles with a trailer tow hitch) : Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG) ; EU type approval number (for certain coun- tries only) = VIN ? Maximum gross vehicle weight (kg) A Maximum gross vehicle weight of vehicle combination (kg) (for specific countries only) B Permissible front axle load (kg) Service products and filling capacities C Permissible rear axle load (kg) D Paint code 327 Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is sample data. This data is different for every vehicle and may differ from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Service products include the following: Rfuels Rlubricants Rcoolant Rbrake (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appropriate section. You can identify service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB Rclimate Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. VIN ; can be seen. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 326). For certain countries only: the VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windscreen. Z Technical data Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) : Vehicle manufacturer ; Place of manufacture = Date of manufacture ? Vehicle model A VIN G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. 328 Service products and filling capacities 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other designations, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 i You can obtain further information at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Fuel Important safety notes G WARNING Technical data Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. Tank capacity The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Model Total capacity CLA 180 d BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 40 l or 50.0 l CLA 250 Sport Models with 4MATIC 56.0 l All other models 50.0 l Model Of which reserve fuel Mercedes-AMG vehicles Approx. 8.0 l All other models Approx. 6.0 l Petrol Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON, which conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. Service products and filling capacities RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol) RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol) RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) Rpetrol with additives containing metal Rdiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. CLA 200, CLA 250, CLA 250 4MATIC, CLA 250 Sport, CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 93 RON. All other models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower RON. RE100 i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Information on refuelling (Y page 153). Mercedes-AMG vehicles ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 ROZ, that conforms to European standard EN 228 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON. This may reduce engine perform- ance and increase fuel consumption. As much as possible, avoid driving at full throttle. ! As a temporary measure, if the recommen- ded fuel is not available, you may also use unleaded petrol in emergencies with an octane rating of 91 RON. Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel consumption, and the engine power output is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throttle. If no fuel other than petrol with 91 RON or a lower grade is available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel at a qualified specialist workshop. CLA 250 (only for certain countries). ! Only refuel using sulphur-free unleaded pet- rol with at least 95 ROZ, that conforms to the European standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equivalent specification. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the emission control system. i In some countries, the available petrol may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. As soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours are reduced. Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol should be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by MercedesBenz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Z Technical data ! Do not use the following: 329 330 Service products and filling capacities Diesel Fuel grade G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, components in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to diesel fuel. ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that conforms to the European standard EN 590 or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the engine and exhaust system. ! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur. Low outside temperatures In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the EN 590 standard defines various climatedependent temperature categories. Malfunctions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifications outlined in EN 590. At unusually low outside temperatures, it is possible that the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from warmer areas may not be suitable for operation in colder climatic conditions. i Further information on country-specific fuel properties and fuel types with low-temperature resistance can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling stations. Engine oil General notes Technical data Rheating ! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: in countries outside the EU, only use low sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged. ! Vehicles without a diesel particle filter: in countries where only diesel fuel with a high sulphur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter intervals. More information about the interval for oil change can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Usually you will find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the petrol pump, ask the filling station staff. Information on refuelling (Y page 153). When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 327). The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the function and service life of an engine. After extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves engine oils that correspond to the current technical standard. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz-approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on tested and approved engine oils can be obtained from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz approval is indicated on the oil container by the inscription "MB-Freigabe" or "MB- Service products and filling capacities Petrol engines All models MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.5 Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval CLA 180 d CLA 180 d BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 226.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 All other models 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. i If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may top up with the following engine oils until the next oil change: RPetrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B3 RDiesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3 It may be used only once and the topping-up quantity must not exceed 1.0 l. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Model Replacement amount CLA 180 CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition CLA 200 5.8 l CLA 180 d CLA 180 d BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 4.5 l CLA 200 d CLA 200 d 4MATIC CLA 220 d CLA 220 d 4MATIC 6.5 l Mercedes-AMG vehicles 5.5 l All other models 5.6 l Additives ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescribed intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 327). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Service Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Z Technical data Approval" and the corresponding designation, e.g. MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.51. You can call up an overview of approved engine oils on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by entering the designation, e.g. 229.5. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Petrol engines: in certain countries, different engine oils can be used, provided that the maintenance intervals are reduced. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. 331 332 Service products and filling capacities i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. Technical data ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Service Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 327). The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It is responsible for the following: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation will be approximately 130 †. The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -37 †. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. i The coolant is checked at every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen washer system Important safety notes G WARNING If windscreen washer concentrate comes into contact with hot components of the engine or the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure the windscreen washer concentrate does not come into contact with the filler neck. ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and Win- terFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the spraying nozzles could become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 327). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. Vehicle data i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: heights specified may vary as a result of: - tyres - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload Rvehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 326) Rfor certain countries only: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle Rthe Dimensions and weights Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model CLA 180 CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition CLA 180 d CLA 180 d BlueEFFICIENCY Edition : Height when opened 1744 mm CLA 220 (117.345) CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC CLA 250 Sport CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC 1749 mm Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1727 mm All other models 1745 mm Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. CLA 220 (117.345) Vehicle length Vehicle height Technical data For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. 333 Vehicle width including exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors Wheelbase Maximum roof load Maximum boot load All other models Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2032 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1777 mm Wheelbase 2699 mm Z 334 Trailer tow hitch Model Vehicle length Model Vehicle height Mercedes-AMG vehicles 4691 mm Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1416 mm All other models 4640 mm All other models 1432 mm Model Vehicle height CLA 180 CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition CLA 180 d CLA 180 d BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 1431 mm CLA 250 CLA 250 4MATIC CLA 250 Sport CLA 250 Sport 4MATIC 1436 mm Model Maximum roof load Mercedes-AMG vehicles 100 kg All sports models 100 kg All other models Model Maximum boot load Mercedes-AMG vehicles 100 kg All sports models 100 kg All other models Trailer tow hitch Technical data Trailer loads Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8% from a standstill) Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 196). Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 180 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 180 d 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 200 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 200 d CLA 250 Model CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Manual transmission 1500 kg Trailer tow hitch 335 Missing values were not available at the time of going to print. Model Automatic transmission CLA 220 CLA 200 d 4MATIC CLA 220 4MATIC CLA 220 d CLA 220 d 4MATIC CLA 250 4MATIC Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 196). Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 180 1200 kg 1200 kg CLA 180 d 1200 kg 1200 kg CLA 200 1400 kg 1400 kg CLA 200 d 1500 kg 1500 kg CLA 250 1500 kg 1500 kg Model Manual transmission CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 1200 kg Model Technical data Model Automatic transmission CLA 220 1500 kg CLA 200 d 4MATIC 1500 kg CLA 220 4MATIC 1500 kg CLA 220 d 1500 kg CLA 220 d 4MATIC 1500 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 1500 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 196). Model Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 180 695 kg 715 kg CLA 180 d 720 kg 730 kg Z 336 Trailer tow hitch Model Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 200 695 kg 715 kg CLA 200 d 750 kg 750 kg CLA 250 720 kg 735 kg Model Manual transmission CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition 695 kg Model Automatic transmission CLA 220 730 kg CLA 200 d 4MATIC 750 kg CLA 220 4MATIC 750 kg CLA 220 d 750 kg CLA 220 d 4MATIC 750 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 750 kg Maximum drawbar load Technical data ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload. Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 196). The drawbar load is not included in the trailer load. Model Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 180 75 kg 75 kg CLA 180 d 75 kg 75 kg CLA 200 75 kg 75 kg CLA 200 d 75 kg 75 kg CLA 250 75 kg 75 kg Model CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Model Manual transmission 75 kg Automatic transmission CLA 220 75 kg CLA 200 d 4MATIC 75 kg Trailer tow hitch Model 337 Automatic transmission CLA 220 4MATIC 75 kg CLA 220 d 75 kg CLA 220 d 4MATIC 75 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 75 kg The actual drawbar load may not be higher than the specified value. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball coupling. The maximum payload of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball coupling. Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 196). Manual transmission Automatic transmission CLA 180 995 kg 995 kg CLA 180 d 1000 kg 995 kg CLA 200 995 kg 995 kg CLA 200 d 1000 kg 995 kg CLA 250 1010 kg 1010 kg Model CLA 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition Model Manual transmission 985 kg Technical data Model Automatic transmission CLA 220 1005 kg CLA 200 d 4MATIC 1045 kg CLA 220 4MATIC 1055 kg CLA 220 d 995 kg CLA 220 d 4MATIC 1045 kg CLA 250 4MATIC 1055 kg Z 338 339 340